JP2019041978A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a player from getting tired of a game at an early stage.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: second privilege imparting means capable of imparting a second privilege which is advantageous to a player when second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a specific second determination result; game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state, switching the game state from the first game state to the second game state to set in a period during which the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, and setting a game state which is disadvantageous to the player from the second game state when the first privilege is imparted; and first control means capable of executing first control for forcibly making a first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information be a result other than a specific first determination result on the basis of establishment of the first condition during a period in which first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information, thereby suppressing a player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. By providing the player with the player, the interest has been improved.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, the lottery game to be executed when the game ball has won the start winning opening is only displayed in a fluctuating manner according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a problem of that.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of performing a first determination, and first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. A first dynamic display means capable of displaying dynamically on the screen, and a first dynamic display period capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means A first benefit that can be awarded with a first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a determination mode and a display mode for showing the first determination result specific to the display means A second determining means capable of executing a second determination, and a second motion capable of causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determining means Display means and the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means In a case where the second identification information is displayed in a second dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display period, and in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, A game state capable of setting second benefit giving means capable of giving a second benefit which is advantageous to the player, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state which is advantageous to the player over the first gaming state Setting means, and the game state setting means is configured to display the first game state from the first game state during a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine can set a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first benefit is awarded. The first identification information is a dynamic table by the first dynamic display means. The first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly made to be other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition during a period of It has the 1st control means which can perform 1 control.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first condition is that the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is configured to be able to be established on the condition that the second benefit is given.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, A special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is awarded to the player based on the determination as the special second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination means capable of performing the first determination and the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means A first dynamic display means capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; A first benefit giving means capable of giving a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing the specific first determination result on a display means; (2) second determination means capable of executing determinations, and second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means; Second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means When the second identification information is displayed in a determinable second dynamic display period determining means and a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, the second game is advantageous to the player It has a second benefit granting means capable of granting two benefits, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The gaming state setting means may switch and set the first gaming state to the second gaming state in a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine is capable of setting a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first benefit is awarded, and the first dynamic display means During the period in which the first identification information is displayed dynamically Based on establishment of a first condition, it is possible to execute first control that forcibly sets the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result It has a first control means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the first condition can be satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is provided when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Is configured.

  Therefore, the configuration is such that it is possible to avoid that the first benefit is given and the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set by giving the second benefit, so the game is expected in expectation of giving the second benefit. There is an effect that it can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the second determination means can determine the special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and the first determination means determines the first special determination result based on the determination as the special second determination result. A special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than a benefit is provided to the player.

  Therefore, since the special benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit is given to the player by the second determination, even with the configuration in which the grant of the first benefit is restricted, it is possible to suppress the problem of reducing the player's willingness to play It has the effect of being able to

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 3rd symbol in a 1st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a display. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when only special figure 1 has a reserve ball at the time of the end of the jackpot displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is the It is a figure showing an example of the display contents at the time of dash mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in one embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the end of the dash mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in case the latent probability after the big hit end which is displayed with is set is set, (c) is the 3rd symbol indication which is indicated with the 3rd symbol indicator in 1st execution form It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in case the latent probability after the big hit end which is displayed with the device is set, and there are 1 to 4 special drawing 1 number of holding balls. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a main control device in the first embodiment FIG. 6C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table set in the ROM of FIG. 4C. FIG. 4C shows the contents of the second hitting random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the big hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table for normals set to ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a probability variation jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a main control in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of an apparatus. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for normals set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for latent confirmation set to. It is the model which showed typically the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment is there. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 temporary stop processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a Tokusatsu 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 cancellation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the holding ball number process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the decision related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the variable stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 2nd execution form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the ending screen of the big hit game displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a 3rd symbol display in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the content of the display screen in the positive variation state displayed with an apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content after the fluctuation start per per special figure 1 displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment (special figure 2 non-fluctuation), and (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of a special figure 2 small hit in RUSH displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content after the fluctuation start per special figure 1 displayed in the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment (during special figure 2 change), and (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation stopping during fluctuation per special drawing 1 displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table 2 for the jackpot special selection for probability variation latent confirmation set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for probability change set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a main control device in the third embodiment FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a second random number 3 table set in the ROM of FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a main control in the third embodiment It is the model which showed typically the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern 3 table set to ROM of an apparatus. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the transfer destination selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the transfer destination selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the transfer 1 table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the transfer 2 table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the special table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game when the number of remaining probability changes is 30 times or more at the time of the latent status transition in a 4th embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game in case the number of remaining probability changes is less than 30 times at the time of the latent status transfer in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of having won the small hitting B in the state where the RUSH remaining frequency is 30 times or more, and (b) is small in the state where the RUSH remaining frequency is less than 30 times It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of having been elected to hitting B. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of 4 tables for normals set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 4 tables for probability variation and latent probability set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically a part of. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit display selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frequency related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640, etc. capable of entering a large number of nails and balls is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a are for the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the vehicle is attached. The contents of a large number of ball entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. Ball port 63, upper first ball port 64b1, lower first ball port 64b2, second ball port 640, left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable The display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the turning rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS) It is configured such that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the ball enters the first upper ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not he has entered the ball (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (winning), the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball is on the ball However, when the player enters the second ball entry port 640 (winning), the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37A shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The first symbol display device 37B is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. .

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (probability change state, latent state, normal state, etc.) by lighting state, or the first symbol changes. Indicates whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display a combination of symbols for showing lottery results), or the stop symbol corresponds to a jackpot advantageous to the player or is it disadvantageous The lit state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the outlying symbol, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lit state, and the number of rounds in the big hit and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, although various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), any structure that allows the player to identify various game states may be used. For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (flashing mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is on and the period in which the light is off.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, drawing is triggered by the fact that the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 enter the ball (winning) (lottery of special symbols) Is done. And in the lottery of the special symbol, it performs a yes or no judgment (big hit lottery) whether or not it is a big hit. Here, on the basis of the determination that the jackpot is won, the jackpot game to be a bonus game state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is opened so that the ball can be easily won, and each winning opening is By winning the ball, a game in which many winning balls can be acquired in a short time is executed. During this big hit game, it is executed after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display), and an opening period (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65) or a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) Right after the round game period for which the closed state is set, the open state is set, and the round game period for 1 is over, the next time after the end of the round game period of 1) The predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the round game is started, the interval period in which the closing state is set, and the closing of the predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the last round game period is over A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period in which a state is set is set.

  In this manner, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the big hit is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display), the opening period is set to match the timing when each winning opening in the big hit game is in the open state. Since preparation can be made to fire in any direction, the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Further, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the present jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress that a new special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the last round game is over, so after the jackpot game is over Since it is possible to prepare to shoot the ball in any direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it is also determined the jackpot type. Although the detailed description will be described later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end with 16 rounds of the jackpot game, the 16R latent probability jackpot that the low probability of the normal symbol is given, jackpot The number of game rounds is 2 rounds High probability state of special symbol after big hit end, 2R latent probability big hit with low probability of normal symbol, high round state of big hit game is high probability state of special symbol after big hit end in 2 rounds , 2R probability variation jackpot that is given a high probability state of the normal symbol is prepared.

  In addition, the jackpot which is not the jackpot mentioned above as a lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and a part of the case where it is determined to be out, a bonus less than the jackpot mentioned above (e.g. It is configured such that a bonus for awarding a winning ball corresponding to the number of balls that has been won is won for a small hit awarded to the player. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit (a small hit or not) as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, if the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, if it is a big hit A symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

  In the present embodiment, one of “normal state”, “latency state”, and “probable state” is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to the low probability (1/229), and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is set to the low probability (11/233). The game state (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: Low probability state), and in the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to low probability (11/233). Playing state (hereinafter, special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), and the probability change state is set to the high probability (1/120) of the special symbol and the hit of the normal symbol It is a gaming state in which the probability is set to the high probability (232/233) (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state).

  In addition, although a detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, even when the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won In accordance with, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. In this way, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while being aware of the set gaming state in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Here, the jackpot type possessed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described in detail, “16R latent probability jackpot” is a jackpot game (right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. It is a jackpot type in which a latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set after a big hit game of opening for 16 rounds.

  The “2R latent probability jackpot” is the jackpot state (special symbol high probability state) after the jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (a jackpot game in which the left variable winning device (first attacher) 65 is opened for 2 rounds) , It is a jackpot type in which the low probability state of the symbol is set.

  The "2R probability variation big hit" is the jackpot game of the maximum round number 2 round (the left variable winning device (first attacher) 65 is opened for two rounds, the probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol after the big hit game High probability state of) is the jackpot type to be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the jackpot game corresponding to “16R latent probability big hit” is executed, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is operated for a predetermined period (30 seconds or 10 balls). A period of time until winning a prize) open game (round game) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times). Therefore, it is possible to easily win a ball on the right variable winning device 650 by playing a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot at the right variable winning device 650) during this jackpot game. The right variable winning device 650 is configured such that 15 winning balls are paid out for winning a single ball, and the player is given more winning balls than the left variable winning device 65 described later. It is configured to be able to.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to "2R probability variation jackpot" or "2R latent probability jackpot", the jackpot game according to the "16R latent probability jackpot" described above as the opening operation of the left variable prize device (first attacker) 65 A more restricted opening operation is performed. Specifically, a jackpot game in which a game (round game) in which the left variable winning device (first attacher) 65 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) during one jackpot game is executed twice is executed Be done. The left variable winning device 650 is configured such that 15 winning balls are paid out for winning one ball, and the player is awarded with a winning ball less than the above-described right variable winning device 650. It will be That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game corresponding to "16R latent probability jackpot" is the opening period of the attacker in the jackpot game than the jackpot game corresponding to "2R probability oddity jackpot" or "2R latent probability jackpot". There is a long, easy to get a lot of winning balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player have different benefits (winning balls) according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, so the player is elected for the jackpot. Not only whether or not to do, it is also possible to be interested in the jackpot type that is set. In the present embodiment, the round game is executed many times more in the case of the jackpot game (jackpot game corresponding to “16R latent probability jackpot”) which is advantageous to the player than the other jackpot games, and further, The number of winning balls per winning ball is also increased, but it is sufficient if the number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot game is different, for example, it is executed during the jackpot game The number of rounds to be played may be the same, and only the number of winning balls for one ball may be different, or the number of winning balls for one ball may be the same, and only the number of round games played during the jackpot game. It may be configured to be different. In addition, depending on the type of the variable winning opening that is opened during the big hit game, it may be configured such that the gaming state set after the big hit game is different.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there is disposed a general ball entry port 63 from which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B is triggered by the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) in the variable display unit 80. To the third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs the variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 The 2nd symbol display device (not shown) comprised with LED which carries out the change display of the 2nd symbol by making passage of a ball of 2 as a trigger is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). For example, the upper, middle and lower Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device, each time the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x" as a display symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) The variable display is performed to alternately turn on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized prize 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 It is configured to be in an operating state (open state) only for a predetermined time.

  In addition, it is determined that the illegal game (for example, right-handed game is being performed during the normal state) is being performed, and processing for notifying abnormality is that the number of pending storages of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (right If it is determined that the number is 2 or more), it may be configured to execute the abnormality notification. As a result, it is possible to suppress that a small amount (one shot) of balls fired due to an operation error of the player intrudes into the right side area and the abnormality notification is executed.

  In addition, during the high probability state of the normal symbol (general figure high certainty), using other methods such as increasing the open time and the number of times of opening of the motorized part 64a per hit to increase the probability of hitting If it is determined that the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 during confirmation, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the general view at high probability, the hit probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electrically operated part 64a for the game may be fixed regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board 13, a part of the balls flowing down the left area (approximately 50%) is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) You may. Further, the number of assembled normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembling position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the right of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided in which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  Below the upper first ball entry port 64b1, a lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. That is, in the first embodiment, the same big hit lottery (special figure 1 lottery both when the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and when the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2) ) Is configured to be performed.

  On the right side of the lower first entrance 64b2, in the right area of the game board 13, a second entrance 640 for allowing a ball to enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. In addition, a general entrance 63 is disposed in the left area of the game board. Among the balls flowing down the left side area, the general ball entry port 63 is arranged so that the ball flowing down the flow path that is difficult to reach the left variable winning device 65 can easily enter the ball. Thereby, for example, during a big hit game in which the left variable winning device 65 opens, the ball fired by the left hitting game also benefits the player even if it flows down the channel which can not win the left variable winning device 65. It becomes possible to give a (prize ball).

  When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, four balls are paid out as winning balls, and when a ball enters the second entrance 640, one ball is entered. It is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. Also, when a ball enters the general entrance 63, six balls are paid out as a winning ball. By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the ball will only win in the second ball entry port 640 where one winning ball is set, so the number of balls increases. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the right hitting game is performed during the normal state.

  In addition, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be executed, but in the present embodiment, the second executed in the normal state 2) As a fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of special symbol (special figure 2), a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it can be suppressed that the lottery of special figure 2 is executed efficiently.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the right area of the gaming board 13 Even if a game for entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is executed, it takes a long time until one lottery result is determined, and it is more than the number of winning balls obtainable by the left hitting game. It is configured so that only a small number of winning balls can be obtained. That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game (in order to cause the ball to flow down to the left area of the game board 13 and execute the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, the first It is a game advantageous to the player to play a game for entering a ball into the ball entrance 64b1.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first upper ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls to be paid out and the second entering balls when the balls have won in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 The same number as the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the mouth 640, for example, the winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first upper ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The number may be configured as one.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the lower first ball entrance 64 b 2 is accompanied by a motorized accessory 64 a. The motorized accessory 64a is configured in a single vane shape, and is in a closed state (see the motorized accessory 64a (solid line) in FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the lower first ball inlet 64b2. The ball is variably controlled to an open state (refer to the electric part 64a (dashed line) in FIG. 2) which allows the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  The motorized accessory 64a is normally located in the closed state, and is configured such that the ball can not enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. And based on having won by lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the variable operation is performed to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating a drive accessory for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a bonus item driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a bonus character for effect (not shown), or the operation content to the frame button 22 is corresponded. To set an audio output command for causing the audio output device 226 to output sound, or set a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the content of operation on the frame button 22 You may configure it.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7A. FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, and for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle and lower) L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is Each of the ten main symbols is provided with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each piece of identification information that simulates a number. In this manner, by using the characters corresponding to the respective identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed at the top, middle and bottom respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling in the horizontal direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured such that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed The symbol row is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the symbol row L3 in the lower figure is configured to be scrolled and displayed from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) not showing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction, and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the oblique direction. In a state where each symbol row L1 to L3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together in a combination of big hit symbols on the effective line (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols). For example, a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, the respective effective lines (V1 to V5) are formed to include the symbol display positions of the respective symbol rows L1 to L3, so the third symbol is formed. Until all the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the third symbol variation display executed in the main display area Dm interesting until the final symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned thing, but is arbitrary, the number of the symbol row, the direction of the variation display of the symbol in the symbol row, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol obtained by combining an image such as a figure or character and a numeral may be configured as a third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation display area of the third symbol is displayed. Makes it difficult for the player to see if the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may do it. Also, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), and may be changed again.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which the player is difficult to identify Although it is configured to include the difference in (3), the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be made different so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

  Next, contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed on the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating whether or not the lottery condition of the special symbol (during lottery or not) and the lottery result is displayed. , The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is comprised so that the 4th symbol (special figure 2 4th symbol) for showing may be displayed on small display area Dm2.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery situation of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can simultaneously change. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (Refer to FIG. 6 (a)), showing the situation that the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (refer to FIG. 6 (a)), the lottery of the special symbol Although it is configured to show the result, without being limited thereto, for example, a display mode in which the figure is deformed using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the color is changed, and displaying the display manner showing a specific symbol or color in a stopped state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (during variation), and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be configured so as to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in a lottery (during a change) without a warning. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. Although the example which forms in the upper right side of field Dm is shown, the position where this 4th design display field is formed, size according to the production feature of the fluctuation production which is executed in the central part of main indicatory territory Dm It may be different.

  By comprising in this way, the area | region where a fluctuation production is performed is restrict | limited by 4th symbol display area, and it can suppress that a rendering effect falls. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to run.

  A small display area Dm3 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding a direction (game direction) in which the ball is fired to the player is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

  In the present embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as a guidance display area. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be launched toward by simply viewing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Since it is possible, it is possible to provide the gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

  In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), the display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform the right-handed game and the left-handed game for the player The "left-handed" display mode for guiding the user is configured to be displayed, and the "right-handed" display mode is a game state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, Displayed during latent condition and during a specific jackpot game (during jackpot operation to open the right variable winning device 650), the display mode of "left strike" is a predetermined period (for example, after the right strike game is ended) 10 seconds) is configured to be displayed. Also, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state or the probability change state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) It is configured such that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5 (b), the explanation will be continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the number display mode for displaying the number of holding balls of each special symbol is displayed, and in the small display area Dm1a, the number of holding balls for the first special symbol Special figure 1 reservation information for showing the number of memories) is displayed, and special figure 2 reservation information for showing the number of holding balls (number of reserved memories) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm 2 a.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6A, but the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a have the prize information stored in advance pending in addition to the value for indicating the number of pending balls of the corresponding special symbol. The determination result (pre-reading result) is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while giving expectation to the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbol stored and stored).

  Further, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sub display area Ds is configured to display a comment on the game content being executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Note that the sub display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of holding balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 is displayed in the sub display area Ds. You may configure.

  In this case, for example, it may be configured to display in the sub display area Ds a holding display mode (for example, a holding symbol display mode having a circular shape) for individually indicating the number of holding balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the number of balls currently held for the special symbol by the displayed number of the held display mode. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning a prize information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the result of the judgment.

  By configuring in this manner, a game is performed while giving expectation that a big hit will be won in the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol in which the display mode is changed among the holding symbols that can be present in plurality. You can Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since the holding symbols corresponding to the number of holding memories are displayed, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of holding symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the display of the suspension symbol changed to.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the information regarding the big hit game is displayed It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area of the main display area Dm to that of the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the contents to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball is inserted into the upper first inlet 64b1, the lower first inlet 64b2, or the second inlet 640. Continue until the ball. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player has been firing the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) continuously, any one of the upper first entry port 64b1, the lower first entry port 64b2 and the second entry port 640 The situation where there is no ball entry is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), pachinko machine 10 is because the player quits playing the game. It is because the game by is not performed at all.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the ball newly enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. In the case, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 6-7, the contents of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the upper first entry ball opening 64b1, the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2, or the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning combination), it is used as a trigger to set the first special in the first symbol display device 37 The variable display of the symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special view 1 or the special view 2, variation representation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to display the special view 1 and the special view 2 at the same time, and according to the set gaming state, the ease of lottery (variation) of each special symbol Are configured differently. Then, the third symbol, which is the target of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, executes the lottery (variation) in the gaming state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. It is configured to be the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is easy to be played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easy to execute the fluctuation effect using the third symbol all the time regardless of which gaming state is set, and it is possible to enhance the effect. In addition, the type of the special symbol to be corresponded as the third symbol may be changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 without being limited to the configuration used in the present embodiment, for example, the third symbol The one variation effect may be set based on both the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the special figure 2. Specifically, the special figure 1 variation in which the variation time of 30 seconds is set is executed, and in the case of executing the special figure 2 variation in which the variation time of 50 seconds is set 5 seconds after that, 30 seconds of When special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation production of 55 seconds is set, fluctuation result of special figure 1 fluctuation of 30 seconds (lottery result) within the fluctuation production and fluctuation of special figure 2 fluctuation of 50 seconds The result (lottery result) and may be notified to the player. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the lottery results of a plurality of special symbol lottery by one fluctuation effect, and therefore the lottery result set when both the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are both out It is possible to make the setting number of the fluctuation effect indicating that it is smaller than the number of times of drawing (the number of times of fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the frequent execution of the fluctuation effect indicating the disengagement.

  First, among the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of ordinary symbol) after the end of the big hit game of the present embodiment The flow of the game when the state is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (b) and 7 (c). FIG.7 (b) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the presentation content performed when the number of holding balls of a 1st special symbol (special figure 1) is "0" at the time of completion of a big hit game, and is a figure. 7 (c) is a timing chart showing a flow of effect contents to be executed when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "3" at the end of the big hit game. In the present embodiment, different gaming states are set after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type, and when the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special view 2 game (right The game is set to be advantageous to the player. Specifically, during the latent state, the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is easier to be executed than the other gaming state (special figure 2 is easy to be set a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is set to be easy to win the lottery result (big hit (big hit D), small hit) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery.

  However, since this embodiment is a simultaneous variation type (special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation have a function to be executed simultaneously (in parallel)) game machine, the jackpot is determined after the end of the jackpot game After the state is set, the player performs right-handed game and enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and even while executing special figure 2 lottery (variation), special figure 1 is reserved at the end of the jackpot game Is stored, or if the ball fired after the end of the big hit game enters the upper 1 entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, a special figure 1 lottery is to be executed. Become. Then, when the player wins a big hit by the special figure 1 lottery before the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit), the player is in spite of being in the latent state There is a problem that a jackpot game which is disadvantageous to the player is executed, giving a sense of distrust to the player. In order to solve the problem, in the present embodiment, when winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small hit), the big hit of the special figure 1 under execution The change is configured to be able to be forcibly stopped by taking out the lottery result (the change result). In addition, the probability of winning a small hit (about 1/2 in the special figure high probability state) is better than the probability of winning the large jack (about 1/110 in the special figure high probability state) as the lottery probability of the special figure 2 It is configured to have a high probability. By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is executed in the state where the latent state is set, the special figure 2 game is executed multiple times during the variation period, the special figure It is possible to forcibly stop and stop one jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 lottery (the jackpot game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot game based on the special figure 2 lottery) is executed during the latent state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a sense of mistrust. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the latent state can be set immediately after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 game which executes the special figure 1 lottery by the left hitting game, When the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, when the latent state is set, it is easy to generate a situation in which the reserve storage of Special Figure 1 is included and the reserve storage of Special Figure 2 is not created. In this state, if the player interrupts the game (restroom rest), the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of stored memories during the latent state, and the special state is set during the latent state. There was a problem that the jackpot of FIG. 1 would be won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, when there is a holding ball in the special view 1, the right hitting game is executed promptly, and the ball to the second ball entrance 640 The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect prompting the player to enter the ball and cause the player to win a small hit. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a jackpot game that would be disadvantageous to the player in the latent state by winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery.

  First, referring to FIG. 7 (b), when transitioning to the latent state after the end of the jackpot game, there is no special figure 1 holding ball at the end of the jackpot game (ending (ED)) (0 pieces) The flow of the display content of the presentation performed in the case In this embodiment, when the ending (ED) period rushing in (see FIG. 7 (b) A) set after the end of the last round game to be executed during the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (b) A), it is determined whether or not to suspend If it is determined that the special figure 1 is not held (is 0) according to the judgment, the special figure is in the latent state based on the special figure 1 held which is held and held by the end of the jackpot game. (1) A display mode (for super mode) indicating that the latent state (super mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game because the fluctuation is never executed (it is difficult to be done) ED) is displayed. And when the ED period end (see FIG. 7 (b) B), that is, when the jackpot game is over and special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation of the latent state) is executed, there is no special figure 1 holding ball The display mode of the super mode (the mode corresponding to the latent state) is displayed as a display mode indicating the latent state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), when it is determined that there is a special figure 1 holding ball (there are three balls) at the time of entering the ending ED period of the big hit game (see FIG. 7 (c) A), the ED A display mode (ED for dash) for prompting the player to execute the right-handed game quickly during the period is displayed. Then, when there is a special figure 1 holding ball at the end of the ED period, that is, when the big hit game is over and the special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation of the latent state) is executed, the player promptly The display mode of the dash mode is displayed as the display mode for executing the right-handed game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) is executed during the latent state in the present embodiment (the latent state is established in advance (latent). In order to prevent a game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery drawing) from being executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation ( A display mode (a display mode for prompting a right-handed game) for actively executing the lottery is configured to be displayed from the ED period of the big hit game. Thereby, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery drawing) immediately after the game in the latent state is started, and the special figure 1 fluctuation (running) by the small hitting of the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery drawing) The lottery can be forcibly removed (stopped). Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed during the latent state, and it is possible to provide the game in which the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable.

  Next, the display contents displayed during the ending (ED) period of the jackpot game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a view showing an example of a display screen in the ED when the holding ball of the special view 1 is present at the start of the ending (ED) period of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a rabbit character 811 and a turtle character 814 are displayed. In this embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, a specific character (characters 811 and 814) is configured to be displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this manner, the player can grasp the outline (degree of advantage) of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 or the character 814 is displayed on the display screen. Since it can, it can provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In FIG. 6 (a), in the state in which the normal state is set, the special figure 1 lottery (fluctuation) wins a jackpot, and the left variable winning device 65 (first attacker) shown in FIG. It shows an example of the ending screen when “2R latent certain jackpot” is executed, in which a round game to be opened is performed twice (two rounds) and a latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. is there. In this “2R latent probability big hit”, in order to execute the left hitting game for winning the ball to the first attacher during the big hit game, during the round game (from the start of the big hit game, the second round game round During the period until the end, the comment “left-handed” is displayed in the display area Dm3. Then, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the holding ball of the special view 1 exists at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game, the guidance display mode of "right-handed" is displayed in the display area Dm3 In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment saying "Please hurry right and hit the goal ahead of the turtle !!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to hurry (from the ending period) to perform the right-handed game. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, since the game before the jackpot is won and the jackpot game are both played with the left hitting game, the holding ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Since the latent state is set with 0, there is a risk that only the special figure 1 lottery (variation) will be executed during the latent state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game for causing the player to obtain the holding ball of the special view 2 (left) before the latent state is set (ending period of the big hit game) Since the display mode for prompting a hit game is displayed, it is possible to shorten the period from when the latent state is set until the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the game (for example, the special figure 1 jackpot game) based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state.

  Furthermore, as shown to Fig.6 (a), the reservation indication display mode for suggesting the number of present special figure 1 reservation balls is displayed on the small display area Dm4a-the small display area Dm4e. Here, the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e are display areas in which a reservation indication display mode for suggesting the number of special drawing 1 holding balls is displayed. Specifically, the number of holding balls is 1 In the case of Dm4a to Dm4b, Dm4a to Dm4c is displayed if the number of holding balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4d is displayed if the number of holding balls is 3, and Dm4a to Dm4e is displayed if the number of holding balls is 4 Thus, the hold indication display mode is formed. Then, the character "GOAL" is displayed in the small display area Dm4a, and when the special figure 1 holding ball number becomes "0", the effect that the character 811 reaches the goal is executed. As described above, it is possible that the player can visually distinguish the process in which the special figure 1 holding ball number is subtracted in the dash mode having the game property aiming to set the special figure 1 holding ball number to 0. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. In FIG. 6A, the small display area Dm1a is "3", that is, since the number of currently held special figure 1 balls is three, the display area Dm4a to the display area Dm4d are lit and displayed. In addition, in the display area Dm1 in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed, the jackpot symbol "555" corresponding to the jackpot game being executed indicates the lottery result of the second special symbol In the display area Dm2 in which the fourth symbol for display is displayed, a symbol "246" for showing that the lottery result of the previous second special symbol is out is displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, The character of "100" as a prize ball display mode for showing the number of prize balls acquired in the present jackpot game (2R latent certain jackpot), for notifying the progress of the jackpot game in the small display area Dm6 The letters "Round END" are displayed.

  Next, the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 holding ball is present when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball is present when the latent state is set, as shown in FIG. 6B, the dash mode is in the latent state as well. Is configured to be set continuously. During the latent state, it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to execute a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol by causing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed game. And if it wins by a big hit or a small hit by the 2nd special symbol, it is possible to make a temporary stop of the change (lottery) of the 1st special symbol, or to make a forced stop by disengaging. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the variation time is also in the latent state, the first special symbol is more than the second special symbol. Since a long fluctuation time is set, the possibility of winning a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player in the first special symbol during the fluctuation of the second special symbol is extremely rare.

  However, if the player does not execute the right-handed game when there is only the first special symbol holding ball number after the transition to the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol elapses and the player wins a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player. There was a possibility of Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol after the big hit end, it is not the super mode displayed during the latent state but the dash mode for making the player execute the right-handed game promptly. Is displayed, and the effect for digesting the holding ball of the first special symbol is executed.

  In FIG. 7B, a state in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 814 imitating a turtle are competing for GOAL 812 is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm at the center of the display screen, and the sub display area Ds is displayed. The comment "Hurry right!" Is displayed on. Furthermore, the guidance display form of "right-handed" is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. By displaying the display mode for guiding the right hit to both the sub display area Ds and the small display area Dm3 as described above, the player can be emphasized and informed of the right hit game by the player. Also, by varying the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the proper game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player continues to carry out the disadvantageous game. It is possible to suppress the

  The small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the small display area Dm2a holds the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. It shows the state of having won two. Further, in the small display area Dm1a, it is displayed that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is one.

  Returning to FIG. 7 (c), the explanation will be continued. The dash mode ends when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol becomes 0, and switches to the effect for the super mode corresponding to the latent state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7A, a display screen indicating the end of the dash mode will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, or when the win is made, the variation of the first special symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped by the outlier, and the dash mode is It is ended when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol becomes 0 by winning a small hit with the second special symbol in the latent state, and the player is shown in the super mode to indicate that the latent state is in the latent state. It becomes a display mode.

  At the center of the main display area Dm, it is displayed that a character 811 imitating a rabbit competing in the dash mode has passed GOAL 812 prior to a character 814 imitating a turtle. Then, a comment of "GOAL !!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the player is notified of the end of the dash mode in an easy-to-understand manner.

  And at the same time as the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "357" in which the result of the lottery indicates the disconnection. Further, the upper display area Dm4a is lighted and displayed, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of holding balls in the first special symbol has disappeared, and the dash mode is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when winning a small hit with the second special symbol and forcibly stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution by disengaging it (discarding the special figure 1 fluctuation), the lottery of the first special symbol In the display area Dm1 displaying the result, not the actual lottery result but the forced removal symbol "357" is stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation of the discarded special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) It is good to constitute so as to stop and display off symbols in a display mode that can suggest (inform) the result (lottery result) to the player, for example, to change the color of off symbol “357” displayed in the display area Dm1 It is preferable that the player be able to suggest to the player the result of the special figure 1 lottery which has been discarded. Specifically, when the display mode of "357" is displayed in red, it indicates that the lottery result of the discarded special figure 1 lottery is "big hit" and is displayed in rainbow color. Among the "big hit", "the big hit which is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the number of winning balls obtainable during the big hit game is the smallest, and the jackpot state is not set after the big hit game is over) It may be configured to indicate that it is ")". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player grasp that the special figure 1 fluctuation has been discarded and has come off, and the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery that has been discarded. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the benefit given by discarding the special figure 1 lottery. Furthermore, it is not the display mode in the display area Dm1 but the special display discarded by changing the display mode for indicating the stop display mode of the third symbol of the main display area Dm or the number of winning balls acquired during the small hitting game. The results of the lottery may be suggested (notified) or may be suggested (notified) using an audio output means or a light emitting means. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to obtain a sense of security that the player can be prevented from winning an adverse jackpot. Further, when the pre-reading result is a big hit, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player, and it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect.

<About transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, as the gaming state, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol), the positive variation state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high normal symbol) Probability status), latency status (special symbol high probability status, normal symbol low probability status) and three game status can be set, the type of jackpot winning, and the game when jackpot winning A predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14). The plurality of gaming states set here are configured such that the degree of advantage to the player is different, and the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

  First, the case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which processing is performed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 9) has been operated in the initial state (startup processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51)). The normal state is set as the gaming state of).

  In this normal state, if the jackpot A (71% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, the probability variation after the jackpot game is over When the state (challenge mode) is set and the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) or the jackpot C (4% of the jackpot win) is set, the latent state (super mode) is set after the jackpot game is over Are configured to On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery during the normal state, the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot win) and the latent after the jackpot game is over The confirmation state (super mode) is set.

  That is, when winning a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, it enters into the challenge mode (probability variation state) with a probability of 71%, and enters the super mode (latency state) with a probability of 29%. In addition, when winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, it is configured such that the super mode (latency state) is set with a probability of 100%. In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed in the normal state, the fluctuation time of a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, actually, a game (right-handed game) for executing the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is not performed. In the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the long time fluctuation is set regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured such that a short fluctuation time is easily set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set, or the fluctuation when the jackpot is won (big hit Only the fluctuation) may be configured to set a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds). Here, in the present embodiment, when the number of cumulative big hits (the number of big hits since winning a big hit (first hit) in a normal state) reaches 3 times (including the first hit) (when the limit number of times is reached ), So that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the limit number of times is reached in the state where the latent state where the right-handed game is executed is set, The normal state may be set in the state of FIG. Even in such a case, the special figure acquired during the latent state by configuring so that a short variation time is easily set as the variation time of the special figure 2 only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set. (2) It is possible to smoothly manage the suspension (execution of the lottery). Furthermore, when the jackpot of the special figure 2 lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the latent state is 100% higher than the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 lottery (100% in this embodiment) Since the setting is made, it is possible to smoothly execute the lottery which is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming state set after the big hit is different depending on the game content in the big hit game, so the interest of the game to be executed during the big hit is improved. Can.

  Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state will be described in the case where a probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set as the gaming state. In the present embodiment, while the probability change state is set, the left-handed game is executed, and the lottery of the special view 1 is executed. Then, if the jackpot A (60% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state, the jackpot variation state (challenge mode) after the jackpot game is over ) Is set to loop. When the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot win) are set, the latent state (super mode) is set.

  In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 executed based on the special figure 2 reserve stored on hold, the jackpot D (100% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type. After the jackpot game is finished, a positive change state is set again.

  In other words, if you win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery in the definite variation state, the probability variation state (challenge mode) is set to loop with a probability of 60%, and the latent state (super mode) is set with a probability of 40% Be done. And, when winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, it is configured such that the probability variation state is set with a probability of 100%. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured that transition to the latent state becomes easier based on the jackpot win if the positive change state is set than when the normal state is set. As a result, since the degree of expectation to shift to the latent state can be raised stepwise, it is possible to suppress that the player gets bored with the game early. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (three times), since the normal state is forcibly set after the end of the big hit game, the large hit in the normal state The percentage of transition to the latent status in the case where the jackpot is won during the probability change state where the jackpot is won in the normal state and the transition to the latent state is not made in the jackpot than in the case of winning the Even if is set to a high value, the player will not receive an extra benefit.

  Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state in the state where the latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, a game is performed in which the lottery of the special view 2 is mainly performed by the right-handed game. And, if the jackpot D (100% of the jackpot win) is set as the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, after the jackpot game is finished, the latent state is set again.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, if the jackpot A (60% of the jackpot win) is set as the jackpot type, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1, the jackpot If the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) and the jackpot C (15% of the jackpot win) are set after the game is over and the jackpot B (25% of the jackpot win) is set, the latent state (super mode) It is set.

  That is, when winning a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latency state) is looped with a probability of 40%, a definite variation state is set with a probability of 60%, and the special figure 2 lottery If the jackpot is won, the latent state (super mode) is looped with 100% probability. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that is executed during the latent state, the special figure 2 is configured to be easier to set a shorter fluctuation time than the special figure 1. Therefore, while in the latent state, the right-hand game aiming for the special figure 2 lottery is a game method advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 lottery, it is configured to win the small hit in a part of the case where the big hit is not won. When the player wins this small hit, a small hit game is executed in which the amount of the privilege that can be given to the player is smaller than that of the big hit. Moreover, in this embodiment, the probability (about 1/2) of winning in a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery is set higher than the probability of winning in a large hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set, the right hitting game can be performed, and the small hitting game can be executed a plurality of times until the jackpot is won. By configuring in this manner, it is assumed that the period during which the jackpot is not won in the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state (the period in which the lottery results other than the jackpot continuously occur) becomes long, but many small hits Since the game can be executed, it is possible to suppress that the player gets bored early in the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set, it is possible to surely loop the latent state which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player if the drawing of the special view 2 is executed. Thus, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of big hits reaches three, the normal state is always set after the end of the third big hit game. Therefore, when winning the jackpot type that shifts to the latent state in the first jackpot, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 game of winning the jackpot D that is most advantageous to the player twice for the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the latent state is set, that is, executing the lottery of the special view 1 is defined as an appropriate gaming method If the special figure 2 game is executed during the gaming state and the jackpot is won, the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set, and there is a fear that the player is given an excessive privilege. There is.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently in the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the player in the normal state from being given an excessive privilege (a privilege to set an advantageous gaming state). It can be suppressed.

  In addition, during the normal state where the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the player executes a game (right-handed game) different from the appropriate game (left-handed game) and the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the player It is possible to suppress that an excessive benefit (a benefit to set an advantageous gaming state) is given.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability change state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than the state in which the normal state is set, and the ball is in the second entrance 640. The special figure 2 lottery is difficult to be executed by configuring so that it is difficult to enter the ball, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and when the positive change state is set, it is more than the state where the normal state is set. The special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability, and a new special figure 2 lottery is easier to be executed (a special figure 2 lottery is easier to be executed than a special figure 1 lottery) It may be configured to set the fluctuation time or the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, in the state in which the positive change state is set, the second special symbol of the state in which the normal state is set In order to shorten the time set as the fluctuation time (eg , It may be 3 minutes) configuration.

  By configuring in this manner, when a definite change state is set, a game is performed in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed aiming at the transition to the latent state which is the game state most advantageous to the player. There is no transition to the latent condition (left-handed game), but by executing many special symbol lottery, the second special symbol (special figure (special design) is aimed at looking at various variation effects (big hit effects) The player can select a game (right-handed game) in which the lottery of 2) is made.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 According to First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per type classification counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the type of stop in the special symbol out, and the small type used to select the small design type of the special pattern A per type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern are used.

  In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for the variation pattern selection of the normal symbol The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 52) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area corresponding to the ball entering the first upper ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 consisting of four holding areas (reserved first to fourth areas) A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640 consisting of 203a and four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas) is provided. 1 Special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, according to the ball entering timing to upper first ball entrance 64b1 and lower first ball entrance 64b2, first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop The respective values of the type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area , Special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, according to the ball entering timing to the second entrance 640, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, The values of the small hitting type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

  Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area , Special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. Each holding ball storage area (the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, it is possible to promptly execute the next special symbol variation.

  In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, so that the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. For example, it is configured to have a small hit as the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. You may configure.

  Also, as in the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) having no small hit as a lottery result, the small hit The value of the type counter C5 may be stored. As described above, regardless of the special symbol drawing specification (the presence or absence of a small hit), the starting opening (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance) serving as the drawing symbol for the special symbol All the counter values acquired by entering the ball into the mouth 640) are stored, and when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, it becomes necessary among the acquired counter values. By configuring to execute the special symbol lottery using only the value, the same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different specifications (with or without a small hit) of the special symbol lottery. , Parts and technology can be shared, and costs can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the RAM 203 of this embodiment, a normal symbol hold corresponding to the ball entering (passing of a ball) to the through gate 67 consisting of four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) as in the special symbol described above A ball storage area 203c is provided, and each value of the second random number counter C4 and the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and various items are stored. The normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

  In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 Although it has a configuration to reserve and store values, it is not limited to this and does not provide a function (pending storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) It may be configured as follows.

  By configuring in this manner, in order to execute the advantageous lottery in the gaming machine, the lottery that is advantageous to the player as the lottery of one special symbol type is switched to the lottery that is disadvantageous according to the set gaming state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state where a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol have been acquired.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a). FIG. 11A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 8" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value The other values are defined as determination values other than the jackpot (i.e., a small hit or a drop).

  In addition, when the high probability state (certain variation state, latent state) of the special symbol is set, “0 to 3” among the values of the random number counter C1 per first is defined as the jackpot determination value, A value other than the jackpot is defined as a judgment value other than the jackpot (i.e., a small hit or a drop). That is, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined that the jackpot is won with the probability (1/227) of 2/458, and the high probability state of the special symbol is If set, it is defined that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 1/458 (1/109). Therefore, the game state in which the high probability state is more likely to win the jackpot is easier than the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same probability in the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited thereto. The jackpot probability may be configured to be different depending on the type of symbol, and for example, the second special symbol may be configured to lower the jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is prepared in two types, a high probability state and a low probability state, it may be one type or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be configured to be different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states can be set, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and different jackpot probabilities may be set for each state.

  Furthermore, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is small. The value of the random number to be the small winning of the special symbol is set by the small hitting random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the obtained value of the first hitting random number counter C1 is the small hitting random number table 202b. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a small hitting specified in, it is judged as the small hitting of the special symbol.

  Here, the small hitting random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). FIG. 11B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be small hits are defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  Specifically, in the small hitting random number table 202b, the judgment value to be judged as small hitting is specified for each type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low) Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined regardless of the probability state and the high probability state. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not defined, and the small of the first special symbol is small It is stipulated that there will be no wins per win.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "112 to 342". That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning in a small winning in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (does not win) and the probability of winning in a small in the second special symbol lottery is 224/458 (approximately 1/2 .1) is specified.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the first random number counter C1 value for winning the big win and the first random number counter C1 value for winning the small win are different. It is constituted, and it is constituted so that the judgment of big hit and the judgment of small hit will be performed continuously (simultaneously) in one process (process to judge the presence or absence of a hit) which executes the lottery of a special symbol. doing.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot or small winning lottery with a predetermined probability with respect to one acquired counter value (the first random number counter C1 value).

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in a small hit is defined differently between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to differentiate the benefits to be provided to the player between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is not executed frequently unless the specific gaming state (latency state) is set. On the other hand, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm so that a specific gaming state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a table (first hit random number table 202a) referred to when executing the big hit lottery and a table (small hit random number table 202b) referred to when the small hit lottery is performed Although it comprises separately, it may constitute so that a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be performed using one table, without restricting to this. In this case, for example, the first hit random number table 202a may be configured so as to define the range of the counter value for which the small hit is won for each type of the special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the number of data tables that the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot according to the determination value defined in advance according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol in the present embodiment Although it is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hitting, the invention is not limited thereto. For example, according to the number of big winnings and the number of small winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is established, A configuration may be made to vary the first random number counter C1 value defined as a jackpot win or a small jack win, or a jackpot lottery executed under a condition where a predetermined abnormal condition is established, a small jack As a data table for abnormal time to be referred to in the lottery, a data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a big hit or a judgment value corresponding to a small hit is not defined It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation), and both special symbols There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the player does not win the jackpot simultaneously (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a limitation, for example, during the period until the jackpot is won in the drawing of one of the special symbols and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, the drawing of the other special symbol is performed In order not to win the jackpot, it does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, but to draw the special symbol lottery with reference to the dedicated data table in which only the judgment value corresponding to the small jack is specified. You may configure.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the above timing.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot is won by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202d using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2.

  Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202 d will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. As described above, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, random number values for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won are defined using the acquired value of the first punch type counter C2.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining the jackpot type in the normal state, and a probability variation / latency table 202d2 for determining the jackpot type in the probability change state or the latent state. Is at least included.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a table to which the gaming state is referred to in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 13, the table 202d1 for ordinary use is associated with the types of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2) which have won a jackpot and the values of the acquired first hitting type counter C2 in a plurality. The jackpot type of is specified.

  Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 70". In the range of "71 to 95", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "96 to 99", "big hit C" is defined. Also, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the "big hit D" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99".

  Here, the opening operation in the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) to be executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members (opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, left variable winning The operation content (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 of the device 65 and the switching member 650h is stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario which is defined in time series.

  Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 52) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

  In this manner, the operation content of each movable member during the big hit game of moving the plurality of movable members (the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and the switching member 650h) By using the open operation scenario defined in the series, operation control on a plurality of movable members can be centrally managed. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is performed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be properly set, and the other in the case where a failure occurs in one movable member It is possible to smoothly execute the operation process on the movable member of

  The “big hit A” is a big hit of the round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 2 rounds and the first attacker (left variable winning apparatus) 65 is opened for 2 rounds as a big hit game. It is a jackpot type in which the game is executed. In this round game 1, the ball is 10 balls in one round game, or until the opening period passes 30 seconds, the first attacker (left variable winning apparatus) 65 is continuously opened. It is a round game to let you do.

  Also, if "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving flag 203m is set on) after the end of the big hit game, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set ( Certainty change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "jackpot A" is executed, the probability change state is set.

  The “big hit B” is a big hit game where the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds and the big hit game of opening the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 for 16 rounds is executed .

  In addition, when the big hit game based on "big hit B" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving flag 203m is set off) after the big hit game is over, the high probability state of the special symbol is set (The positive change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "big hit B" is executed, the latent state is set. During the latent state, although it will be described in detail later, the special figure 2 game is executed, and the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is selected by the probability that the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is 100%. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot B for which the latent state is set is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player compared to the jackpot A.

  The "big hit C" is the number of rounds as the big hit game (the number of times the round game is executed) is round, and the first attacher (left variable winning apparatus) 65 is opened for 2 rounds Is the type of jackpot to be performed.

  In addition, when the big hit game based on "big hit C" is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving flag 203m is set off) after the big hit game is over, the high probability state of the special symbol is set (The positive change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on the "big hit C" is executed, the latent state is set. Therefore, since it becomes a big hit game which becomes advantageous to a player compared with "big hit A", since it is small in the number of rounds, it becomes a big hit game which becomes disadvantageous to the player when compared with "big hit B".

  That is, when the player wins a big hit by drawing the first special symbol and the normal state is set as the gaming state, the player wins a jackpot game ("big hit A") which is disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 71%. It is configured to win a jackpot game ("jackpot B" or "jackpot C") which is disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 29%.

  In the present embodiment, when the player wins a jackpot advantageous to the player by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed to open the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 for two rounds, and the game If the jackpot wins in favor of the winner, the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is configured to perform a jackpot game to open operation for 16 rounds, so the type of jackpot winning this time is advantageous It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the player is in the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the case of winning the jackpot advantageous to the player and the case of winning the jackpot disadvantageous to the player And the jackpot game may be configured to open the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot winning this time is advantageous depending on the game content of the jackpot game, so the jackpot game It is possible to predict what the gaming state set after the end is until immediately before the gaming state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, each winning device (the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot disadvantageous to the player) as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game The content to control the operation of the open / close door (open / close door 65f1, open / close door 650f1) is identical so that the first attacker 65 and the second attacker 650 are in the open state or the closed state, and corresponds to the jackpot advantageous to the player In the opening operation scenario, as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, an operation control content that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area is defined, and for the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot disadvantageous for the player, the switching member 650h As the operation control content for, it may be configured to define operation control content that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area.

  Further, the operation control contents of the switching member 650h are made the same between the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first The timing to control the operation of the open / close door (the open / close door 65f1, the open / close door 650f1) may be configured to be different such that the attacker 65 and the second attacker 650 are in the open state or the closed state. By changing the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the time it is executed until the first round game is executed, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Enables a ball to easily pass through a specific area, and a jackpot game in which a ball does not easily pass through a specific area. It may be.

  Since "big hit D" is executed the same big hit game as "big hit B" mentioned above, detailed description of the big hit game contents is omitted, but "big hit D" is selected only by the lottery of the second special symbol The jackpot B differs from the jackpot B in that the jackpot B is the most advantageous jackpot game for the player because the state of latency is set after the jackpot game of "jackpot D" is over.

  As described above, this embodiment is configured to set the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player play the game by expecting to win the jackpot, but also to be interested in the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning it can.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and three or less types may be used, or five or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  In addition, the type of jackpot type selected with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation ratio) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type You may comprise so that only a range may be varied. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the fraudulent act of aiming at a specific counter value and acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 is executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, the contents defined in the probability variation / latency determination table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation / latency determination table 202d2. The probability variation / latency determination table 202d2 is a table referred to in the probability variation state or the latency state of the game state. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the table 202d2 for probability variation / latency confirmation includes the type of the special symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2) that has won the jackpot, and the value of the acquired first hitting type counter C2 , And in correspondence, a plurality of jackpot types are defined.

  The table 202d2 for probability change / latency confirmation differs from the table 202d1 for normal use in that the gaming state is referred to in the probability change state or the latent state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), the "big hit A" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" in the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the "big hit B" is in the range of "60 to 84". Is defined, and in the range of "85 to 99", "big hit C" is defined in that it is different.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 99). The value of the small hitting type counter C5 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first upper ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 The ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the time of entering the ball, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing of the ball entering the second entrance port 640 .

  The value of the small hitting type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, it is set in the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type (small hitting game contents) of small hitting is decided making use of small hitting classification selection table 202g which is done.

  Here, the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). In the small hit type selection table 202g, two types of small hit types are defined based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired. Specifically, "small hit A" is specified in the range of "0 to 49", and "small hit B" is specified in the range of "50 to 99". .

  In this embodiment, as described above, the player wins the small hit only in the second special symbol lottery. And when it wins a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, according to the small hit type, it is configured to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is changing at the same time, or forcibly stop at the out-of-pattern doing. Specifically, in the second special symbol lottery, if you win a small hit, if the small hit type is "small hit A" will temporarily stop the first special symbol that is simultaneously changing, "small If it is a hit B ", it is forced off at the end.

  By configuring in this manner, even when the first special symbol that is fluctuating at the same time is a fluctuation that indicates a jackpot when the special figure 2 game is executed during the latent state, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol (2) Since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of 1/2 in the drawing of a special symbol, it is temporarily stopped or forced to stop with an out symbol, preventing the player from winning an adverse jackpot. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although two types of small hit types to be won are used, the number may be two or less, or three or more. By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to provide a small hit type or the like in which the variation of the first special symbol does not stop, and to provide the player with a more fancy feeling, and to provide various game characteristics. it can.

  In addition, it is constituted so that it will be elected in small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol, and different small hitting type (small hitting game according to the type of the special symbol won in small hitting When configuring to set the content), the small hit type selection table may be set so as to define a small hit type (small hit game content) that is different for each special symbol type.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time deviation, long time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is done.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state in which a normal state is set as the gaming state, and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state in which a positive change state is set. And a latency confirmation table 202 e 3 which is used in a latency setting state. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used to select the variation pattern is made different according to the gaming state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is made different. be able to.

  Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a schematic view showing the contents defined in the ordinary table 202e1 in a schematic view. The normal table 202e1 is a data table to be referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the second special symbol is used for the fluctuation time set for the first special symbol lottery. It is specified that the fluctuation time set for the lottery is long.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". The range of fluctuation time is 20 seconds, and the normal reach various types are associated with each other, and the range of “51 to 100” is defined with the reach time of 30 seconds, Super reach A is associated with “101 to 150”. The range has a variation time of 30 seconds in association with super reach B, and the range of “151 to 198” has a variation time of 30 seconds in association with super reach C.

  In addition, a short result of 8 seconds is defined in association with the range of "0 to 50" with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in which the lottery result is "out of place" and the variation time is defined in the range of "51 to 70". 12 seconds is defined in association with a long deviation of 12 seconds, a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "71 to 150", and a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "151 to 170" The super reach A is defined in association with each other, and the range of “171 to 198” is defined in association with the deviated super reach B with a variation time of 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the fluctuation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. (Long fluctuation, long small fluctuation, long deviation fluctuation) is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entry port 640 However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, the ball is allowed to enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1 in the normal state A game, that is, a game for executing a lottery of the first special symbol is configured to be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) which is advantageous to the player. Different fluctuation pattern tables may be used in the case of the jackpot type and the case of the jackpot type indicating the other jackpots (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpot is elected is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won It is good to constitute so that a change pattern of time may become easy to be chosen. As a result, since the longer the fluctuation time set to the fluctuation pattern to be executed can be expected for the game result to be advantageous to the player, the player is made to be interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the large jackpot is won normally than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won It may be configured as described above, whereby a player can be provided with surprising game results when winning a big hit in a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. , Can be expected to the end.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a). FIG. 18A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the probability variation table 202e2, the range of values of the symbol type, the lottery result, and the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the variation pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " A fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in the range of 0 to 99 ", and a super fluctuation of 20 seconds is defined in the range of" 100 to 198 ". Further, in the case of "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0-198", that is, out of fluctuation fluctuation time of 8 seconds in the whole range.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the variation pattern has a variation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Performing variation, small variation, outlier variation) is specified.

  As described above, during the definite change state, a shorter change time is set as the change time of the second special symbol than in the normal state. Furthermore, it is comprised so that it can not newly acquire (pending) a reservation memory of a 2nd special symbol newly during a definite change state. Therefore, once it shifts to the positive variation state, it is possible to digest the retention memory of the second special symbol in a short period of time.

  In addition, the fluctuation time (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol all overlap with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. It may be configured not to be able to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state by configuring and grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the fluctuation time which a player can discriminate | determine not only this but which game state is set may be set.

  Next, the contents of the latency confirmation table 202e3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the latent confirmation table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17B, in the latent determination table 202e3, the range of the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 , A fluctuation pattern of 10 minutes (long fluctuation, outlying long fluctuation) is specified, and if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired fluctuation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern of 1 second (per-short fluctuation, short-per-short fluctuation, out-of-short fluctuation) is defined.

  Thus, during the latent state, unlike the other gaming states, the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the first special symbol lottery (i.e., the special figure 2 game).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the player wins a big hit or a small hit due to the change of the second special symbol, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. As described above, during the latent state, the first special symbol has a variation pattern of only 10 minutes, and the variation of the second special symbol has a variation pattern of only one second, thereby almost certainly causing the variation of the first special symbol Can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from winning an adverse jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to have only a variation pattern of 10 minutes, but a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds) may be configured to be executed. . By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with various game characteristics such as whether or not it is possible to prevent winning in a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player in the special figure 2 game.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by, it determines with a hit of a normal symbol (the 2nd symbol). Also, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low probability of a normal symbol and one for high probability with a high probability of being a hit of a normal symbol from the low probability, and is included in each The number of random numbers to be jackpots is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11 (c), in the case of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the obtained per second random number counter C4 is defined within the range of “0 to 10”, and the common figure is defined, and the high probability of the normal symbol In the case of the state, the obtained per second random number counter C4 is defined within the range of “0 to 231” for the common figure.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  The common pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the common pattern variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 using the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired It is configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, contents defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0-198". Be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained is in the range of "0-198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set to be set. doing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be varied based on the gaming state of the normal symbol and the value of the common pattern variation type counter CS2 in this embodiment, and is set. The ease of entering the ball into the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is configured to be different depending on the fluctuation time. Thereby, in each gaming state, since it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol which is easy to obtain the lottery result which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive benefit. Can.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 4, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 52), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. Second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j, gaming state storage area 203k, time saving A flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small hit flag 203p, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory area 203z.

  In the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) (start winning combination) It is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the above. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment) It is a storage area for storing various counter values that have been set.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, it is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and for details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( Not shown).

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is started The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hitting type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of winning are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), The values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning combination), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, from the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 Values are obtained and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) as well.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the jackpot lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, One of the data (each value of counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above The data corresponding to the start winning combination of is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and each of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2. It is a storage area in which a value is stored. When MPU 201 of main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer is detected from the counter buffer The value of the common figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order of passing through to the through gate 67 (start winning), from among the holding areas where the data are available, from the earliest holding area to be digested .

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of the starting winning a prize, each counter value is stored in the normal design holding ball execution area (not shown) It is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the common pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one starting winning combination is Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Fluctuation display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on winning on the ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (fluctuation performed by the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of display effect) up to 4 times each. In the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S2301 in FIG. 51) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is based on the fact that the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination), the first special symbol holding ball storage When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls) is based on the fact that the ball enters the second entry port 640 (start winning combination), the second special symbol holding ball storage When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 is each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) can be processed as the first special symbol variation start process (Refer to S210 in FIG. 30) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), perform a big hit lottery based on the reference data, and determine the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result Do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, the ball passes through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") ) Is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of waits) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times based on what has been done. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on passage of the ball through the through gate 67. By the initial setting process (see S2301 of FIG. 51) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIG. 48, S2005).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the high probability state (probability state or latent state) of the special symbol. When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is in the high probability state (positive state or latent state) of the special symbol, and when it is off, it is in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. It shows that there is. In the present embodiment, the positive change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off (see S813 in FIG. 34 and S1510 in FIG. 42). In the initialized state, it is set to be off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability variation counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of big hits after the big hit game. In the present embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches 3 times, regardless of which jackpot type, the normal state is set after the end of the third jackpot game. The probability variation counter 203h is added until its value reaches the upper limit 2 after the end of the big hit game (S2704 in FIG. 55) and is reset to 0 when the upper limit 2 is reached (FIG. 55). S2703). The probability variation number counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter is added at the end of the big hit, but may be added at the start of the big hit game. In addition, although the upper limit value is set to 2, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be 2 or less, or 3 or more. By configuring in this manner, various game characteristics can be provided.

  Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 1, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when stopping the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) when the lottery result is small hit A (S1604 in FIG. 43), the special symbol It is referred to in the variation process (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). If it is set to ON in the process of S202, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the same manner as during variation is executed (FIG. 29) S203). That is, while the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i to ON. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 33) is set to on (S701 in FIG. 33: Yes), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 33).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, according to the big hit type, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination showing the big hit (the big hit game is A process of forcibly disengaging and stopping the variation display of the other special symbol) and temporarily stopping the variation display of the other special symbol). In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit, based on the fact that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination showing the small hit, temporarily stop the variable display of the other special symbol (small hit game Stop until the end of) or stop at the end.

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, it is constituted so that change indication of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the game result (for example, a big hit) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, The special symbol (lottery result is a small hit) of is stopped and displayed, and it can be suppressed that a big hit is erased by a small hit.

  Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 2, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 j is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) when the lottery result is a big hit B (S 832 in FIG. 35), the special symbol variation It is referred in processing (refer to FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). If it is set to ON in the process of S204, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the same manner as during fluctuation is executed (FIG. 29) S205). That is, while the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j to ON. Then, when it is determined that the second special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 41) is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 41: Yes), it is set to OFF (S1403 in FIG. 41).

  The gaming state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set gaming state, and the gaming state (setting status of the probability change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m) set after the big hit game is over The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the time shortening flag 203m is set to off, and the probability change state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time reduction flag 203m is set to on. The latency state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is on and the time saving flag 203m is off.

  Furthermore, in the state where the big hit game and the small hit game are being executed, the hit gaming state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed and the big hit game being executed are shown. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

  Then, based on the information stored (stored) in the gaming state storage area 203k, a state command is set, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k is configured to be capable of holding information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k is set.

  As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

  The short time flag 203m is a flag for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. At this time, the short time flag 203m is set to ON corresponding to the winning jackpot type after the jackpot game is over (S2706 in FIG. 55). When the jackpot game is won, the game is set to off. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving the player excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next jackpot is won, but such a configuration For example, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be ended when an end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various types of processing executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit is won), or, the predetermined lottery result When the number of times (for example, small hits) reaches the predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the high probability state of the normal symbol may be ended, or the number of times of lottery of each symbol lottery is When the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be ended.

  In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-described end condition to be different depending on the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning. Thus, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how long the high probability state of the normal symbol will last.

  In the big hit flag 203n, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired is based on the fact that the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640, This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot is at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised by the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. Specifically, the jackpot flag 203n is set to be on for the first special symbol with "10", and the jackpot flag 203n is set to be on for the second special symbol with "01", and configured with 2 bits, When "00", the jackpot flag 203n is set as off.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203 n is configured to be distinguishable from the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, it is possible to distinguish the first special symbol and the special symbol at the start of the change. If one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON even if the other drawing result is a jackpot .

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both of the special symbols are used as a jackpot. When the player wins, the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on which the special symbol variation has been stopped (the final display of the special symbol), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the final display of the special symbol) Depending on the jackpot type at the time of), it is configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

  By configuring in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of special symbol type lottery simultaneously (in parallel), a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and the player is simultaneously excessive. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a benefit (big hit game) is given.

  Furthermore, even if the player wins a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot becomes advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery until the winning result is stopped (confirmed display). It will be possible to win. In this case, it is preferable to execute a fluctuation effect that suggests that the player has won the disadvantaged winning using fluctuation time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible for the player to think that the player has won the disadvantaged jackpot, and therefore, the other special symbol lottery can be actively executed during the fluctuation time.

  In addition, a shorter variation time may be set more easily if a player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, during the fluctuation of one special symbol won in the disadvantaged, it is possible to win the advantage hit in the other special symbol lottery, and to display the result of the stop earlier than the result of the disadvantaged hit (fixed display) it can.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203 n capable of separately storing the lottery result of the first special symbol (hit winning) and the lottery result of the second special symbol (hit winning) is used, but the present invention is limited thereto Without, a common jackpot flag is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203 n is turned on when the jackpot is won in one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. In the other special symbol lottery that is executed with the jackpot flag 203n set to ON, the jackpot may not be won.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot A or jackpot C of the first special symbol is to be executed while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol During, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed is set to ON. This special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 of FIG. 36), it is set to OFF.

  Thereby, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol that is forcibly displayed in the stopped symbol display is prevented from executing the lottery again be able to.

  In addition, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the processing regarding the first special symbol is performed in one special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 33), the processing regarding the second special symbol Is configured to execute fluctuation processing for each special symbol without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 33), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the main hit control process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 52) (S2404 in FIG. 53) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is a special symbol variation process (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S201 in FIG. 29: Yes). Is configured to skip.

  That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a new special symbol fluctuation (lottery draw) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 29) In the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29), a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment configured in this way, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, It is possible to suppress that a new variation process for the second special symbol is executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

  The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. The small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol's success or failure judgment result is a small hit (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and the special symbol variation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. (See S1608 in FIG. 43).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the time of fluctuation is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and is the value 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)? Is determined (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S208 in FIG. 29: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol during fluctuation ( 34) is executed.

  Furthermore, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating disengaging at the time of the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and it is forcibly After the stop display, it is possible to suppress the restart of the fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the value left in the special view 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the time of fluctuation is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) each time the second special symbol variation in progress processing (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and is the value 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)? Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 s is 0 (S 212 in FIG. 29: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the second special symbol during fluctuation ( 42) is executed.

  Furthermore, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating detachment when the first special symbol big hit is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and it is forcibly After the stop display, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special view 2 fluctuation time counter 203s.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a. As a shaft, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the front side, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650 And a solenoid 209 composed of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the motor and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the motorized part, etc., and the MPU 201 receives various commands and controls for these via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types of fluctuation patterns (such as out-of-range, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are respectively set to counter values for selecting fluctuation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  When the restart variation pattern selection table 222b receives a command indicating the restart of the temporarily stopped special symbol, from the remaining time to the remaining time information storage area from "remaining time A" "remaining time B" "remaining time C" The detailed restart variation pattern is selected based on the stored remaining time. As a result, by reselecting the restart fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern that has been temporarily stopped, it is possible to provide a game with less discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20 (b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, Special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, right-handed flag 223j, follow state setting area 223k, special figure 1 provisional A stop flag 223m, a special view temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and another memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and in each of these areas The winning information is stored respectively. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223b enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the fluctuation effect (the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81)) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display) and which counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of balls in the variable display is added due to entering the ball into upper first ball entrance 64b1 or lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the main controller The voice lamp control device indicates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction when the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted in 110. Send to 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. , The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is stored. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 c, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value for the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number of balls in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is changed while being synchronized with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the latent state, when the display holding ball number command is received, the small display area Dm4a to the small display area Dm4e is set to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number. Control to light up accordingly. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to convey the value of the number of holding balls of the first special symbol in the latent state to the player more easily.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is based on the holding ball number command in which the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 with respect to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value at the time of power on, and it is turned on when special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command to notify the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol outputted from main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set as an initial value off when the power is turned on, and turns on when it receives a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol outputted from main controller 110 Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 1 stop classification selection flag 223g is set to ON, when the 1st stop classification command which notifies change stop classification of the 1st special symbol outputted from main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  Special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223i is set to ON, when the 2nd stop classification command which notifies change stop classification of the 2nd special symbol outputted from main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made.

  The right-handed flag 223 j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223 c is one or more when the big hit ending command is received. On the other hand, when the ball holding number command is received during the latent state and it is determined that the value is 0, it is set to off.

  The slave state setting area 223 k is set with data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control unit 110 even when the power is turned on, and the voice lamp control unit 113 can distinguish the backed up gaming state.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether the variation of the first special symbol is temporary stop and is set to ON when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 restart command is It is set to off when received.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether the variation of the second special symbol is temporary stop, and is set to ON when the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 2 restart command is It is set to off when received.

  The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of the change of the special symbol to be temporarily stopped. In this remaining time information storage area 223p, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the fluctuation display of the temporarily stopped special symbol is set. The remaining period information stored when setting the restart effect in the case of restarting is referred to.

  The dash end flag 223 q is a flag for indicating that the number of holding balls of the first special symbol remaining when the latent state is set becomes 0 and the dash mode is ended, and the first special symbol is held. When the ball number command is a command indicating 0, it is set to on. On the other hand, when the determination command of the fluctuation is received, it is set to off.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later in detail.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240 and 241 have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first is entered This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when the ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 22 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on as shown in Fig. 22 (c), The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 22 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. If it is determined that the power-on change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on change image resident in the power-on change image area 235b, the image shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (c) is generated. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the symbols are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The symbol display device 81 can be displayed immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the range of the back surface image and the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c in the back surface image will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory view for explaining the ranges of four types of back images and the back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 23 (b) shows the back side B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage” with respect to the back side A corresponding to the “mid-town stage” . Moreover, FIG. 24 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to an "island stage."

  As the back surface images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, as shown in FIG. 23, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the respective back faces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back face images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 The image controller 237 is controlled such that the image on the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding back image first as the initial position of the display area. . Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. 24 as time passes. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back E, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 24A is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 24B is displayed. In the back surface image shown in FIG. 24B, a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black as time passes, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 24C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.24 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.24 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "town stage", so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" is displayed. By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "Mori stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "kawa stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 24 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 24 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range in FIG. 24 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 24 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surfaces B to D can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to an image in a partial range is stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surfaces B to D face the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface E displays the images of FIGS. 24A and 24B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 24 (a) so that the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 24 (b)-(c) and 24 (c)-(a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 in the meantime. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 24 (b) to 24 (c) and 24 (c) Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 24A to 24B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images in FIGS. 24B to 24C and 24C to 24A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes, using the image data corresponding to the back image that has been output be able to.

  In the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back face image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back faces B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town center stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "empty stage" and "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display one or displaying a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. Moreover, when specifying to display the back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 25). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 26 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 26).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIGS. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 27) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later (see FIG. 27) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 75 (b In S6303), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, while creating (see FIG. 27), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 27, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This processing is performed each time the drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) of the processing is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 7001 of FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 81 (a). See S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. Other display data tables are set to OFF when they are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B). (See S6905 in FIG. 79). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), 79, S6905). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 28 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the values (in this embodiment, 479, 99, 239, 232, 99, respectively) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in accordance with the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through gate passing process is executed, the emission control process is then executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (Fig. 29, S104) performs various determinations (appropriate determinations) and determinations based on the acquired first and second special symbols, based on the acquired counter values, and determines them by predetermined control In the selected variable display mode, the variable display can be controlled on the first symbol display device 37, or various commands for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol are performed. Control for stopping or displaying in the display mode indicating the setting or the determination result (the result of the determination of success or failure) is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether a jackpot game is in progress (big hit) or a small hit game is in progress (small hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the present is a big hit (during a big hit) or a small hit (during a small hit).

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is medium or small hit (S201: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S202). When it is determined that is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special view is updated (S203), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON (S202: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON ( S204). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S204: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped is updated (S205), This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (that is, off) in the process of S204 (S204: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when the second special symbol is stop displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the small hit A. In this embodiment, while the small hitting A game is being executed, the variation time set in the variation display (special figure variation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted) In the period, a temporary stop display mode for displaying that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped by the first symbol display device 37 is displayed.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the jackpot B is won. In the present embodiment, while the jackpot B is set, the variation time of the first special symbol is not updated, and the second special symbol is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 during that period. It is configured that the aspect is not updated.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variation display of the special symbol that was being executed with the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is temporarily stopped, It is possible to suppress giving a sense of distrust to the player when the special symbol variation being executed disappears. In addition, as a display mode for showing that the change display of a special symbol is in temporary stop, for example, a display mode for showing that it is in the normal change display (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The same display mode as blinking display mode that repeats turning off may be used, or a display mode (for example, lighting and turning off at intervals of 0.5 seconds later than the display mode for indicating that variable display is in progress may be repeated (Flashing display mode) may be used. Furthermore, when the display mode of a plurality of colors is configured to be able to be displayed as the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, using a blink display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during temporary stop Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S201 that the current is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution process is executed ( S207).

  In this first special symbol variation in-progress process (S207), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is varying. Processing is performed. Then, when the process of S207 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S207) is 0 (S208), S208 When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S208: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to the process of S211 described later.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209), when the fluctuation time defined in the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, processing to stop the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol Is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, a process to forcibly stop and display the second special symbol in execution in the display mode indicating the detachment Is executed. Furthermore, when the 2nd special symbol under execution wins a big hit, processing for erasing the information about the big hit is performed. The details of the first special symbol variation stop process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S208 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not 0 (S208: No), the process of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S211.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S206 (S206: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S210). In the first special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. When it is in the state where it is possible to execute the new lottery (variation), the process of performing the new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

  After executing the first special symbol variation start process (S210), after determining that the special figure 1 is in the process of variation in the process of S208 (S208: No) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) After execution, next, fluctuation processing (S211-S215) regarding the 2nd special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in progress. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S211 (S211: No), the present is not during the special figure 2 fluctuation, so Then, the second special symbol variation start process for executing a new drawing (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S212), and the present process is ended.

  In the second special symbol change start process (S212), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination based on the hold data and the selection of the variation pattern Processing is performed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), when the lottery result is a big hit (or small hit), the big hit flag 203n (or small hit flag 203p) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is the special figure 2 fluctuation (S211: Yes), the second The special symbol variation in progress processing is executed (S213). The contents of the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but the processing of the same content as the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205) described above is to be processed Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S213) is finished, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S214), and when it is determined 0 (S214) : Yes), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S215), and then this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but, like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209), is specified in the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When the fluctuation time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuation display with a symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol fluctuation in execution is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the detachment. Processing is performed. Furthermore, when the 2nd special symbol under execution wins a big hit, processing for erasing the information about the big hit is performed. In addition, since this embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, if the second special symbol lottery result is not a big hit, it corresponds to the small hit or out Processing is executed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) In one special symbol variation processing, the variation processing (S206 to S210) related to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S211 to S215) related to the second special symbol are executed. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation process regarding a 1st special symbol may be performed prior to the fluctuation | variation process regarding a 2nd special symbol (prioritizing) in one special symbol fluctuation process. Thus, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol become the same by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, the first priority is given first. 1 Special symbol variation stop processing will be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation processing for the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation processing for the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variation for the second special symbol The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

  In addition, the variation process for the special symbol type in which the lottery which is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state may be prioritized to be executed, the player according to the set gaming state In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type for which the lottery that is advantageous is switched is switched, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type for executing the variation process. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player is eliminated (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a first special symbol variation start process (S210) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 29) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S210).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303) ).

  And the number of balls holding command which showed the number of balls holding after subtraction is set (S304), the data stored in the holding area 1-holding area 4 of the 1st special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a, execution area A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (a probability change state, a latent state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (ie, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S402: Yes), S401 is performed based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 11A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of (b) matches the jackpot determination value of the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S402: No), the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a)) is displayed. It is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 per unit matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

  When the processing of S403 or S404 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (S405: Yes), a big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203 n is configured to be capable of storing (setting) information indicating the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot, in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, specifically, the special It is possible to set information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information which shows big hit with respect to the area | region corresponding to a 1st special symbol among big hit flags 203n is set.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 ( S408), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S405: No), the first special symbol display apparatus 37 is set with the first special symbol out pattern (S409), and this processing ends. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203 n is on with respect to the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203 n is set to ON in the process of S 406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) described above.

  When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S502). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state (high probability of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). The probability change flag 203g is turned on in order to set a probability change state after the big hit when it is determined in the process of S2705 of the big hit end process (see FIG. 55) that the winning big hit type is big hit A (S2705: Yes). Is set to When it is determined in the process of S502 that the time saving flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), since the current gaming state is the normal state, it is acquired from the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1. The present jackpot type is determined based on the existing first type counter CS2 (S503). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S502 that the time saving flag 203m is on (S502: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type selection table 202d2 for probability change, The present jackpot type is determined (S504). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203n is off), it is not necessary to determine the big hit type and the processing of S502 to S504 is skipped. , Shift to the process of S505.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the jackpot type to be won is set to be different based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, the player is always excited to see which jackpot type he / she wins It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of holding balls at the time of jackpot winning.

  After the processing of any of S501, S503, S504 is finished, next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S505), and stored in the gaming state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, positive change state) corresponding to the information being read is read out (S506).

  Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S508).

  Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S 509), and the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S 510). The value indicating the fluctuation time of the is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r (S511), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S207). In this first special symbol variation in-progress process (S205), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, and a special symbol interrupted by having won a small hit in the second special symbol lottery A process for resuming symbol variation is executed.

  In the first special symbol variation under-execution process (S205), first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, if one special symbol wins a small hit, and the small hit type is a small hit A, and the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol change is made for a predetermined period. It is configured to be interrupted (a period from the small hit winning to the small hitting game ending) and to resume the other special symbol fluctuation again after a predetermined period (after the small hitting game ending). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the special symbol variation of the other ends during one small hitting game and the game which is hard to understand for the player is executed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the variation of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded depending on the winning small hit type, so the player has won the small hitting type You can enjoy playing the game while irritating.

  If it is determined in the process of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing is ended. .

  In the present embodiment, during the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation in-progress process (in FIG. 31 is configured to execute S205 of FIG. 31, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see S207 of FIG. 32). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON in the process of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small win is not won in the second special symbol lottery. The process skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S209) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 29) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S209). If it is determined that the current special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203r value is "0", that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) It is a process that is executed when it passes.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the big hit type winning this time is big hit A or big hit C. (S802). When it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) is executed, and the process proceeds to S812.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 2 temporary stop processing (S 803) which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S 209 in FIG. 34) will be described. In this special view 2 temporary stop process (S 803), when the process of stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed, the variation result of the second special symbol is interrupted when the variation result is a big hit B. Execute the process

  In the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), first, it is judged whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the second special symbol is in fluctuation (S831). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to interrupt the fluctuation of the second special symbol (temporarily stop) Because there is not, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S831 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value larger than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON (S832) The special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 j is turned on is set (S 833), and this processing ends.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot B is won by the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended), and the second special symbol is resumed again after the jackpot game is over. ing. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is intriguing to the player, whether the present jackpot type is forcibly stopped due to the interruption of the second special symbol or the deviation. In the present embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped when the jackpot B is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be temporarily stopped when a specific result is obtained. Good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a sensation of not knowing when the other special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S802 that the jackpot type selected this time is the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S802: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value larger than 0 (S804). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S806).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (S807), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in execution is stopped and displayed in the display mode (disengagement symbol) indicating the disconnection. It is possible to (fixed display).

  When the process of S808 is finished, it is then determined whether the big hit flag 203n for the second special symbol is set to ON (S809), and if it is determined that the big hit flag 203n is set to ON (S809: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is turned off in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly displayed as being dislodged in the process of S807 described above The setting is made (S810), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S811), and the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S809 that the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery, the process of S810, 811 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S812.

  In the process of S812, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol variation this time is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u corresponding to the first special symbol, the probability change flag 203g, and the time saving flag 203m are set off ( S813) The game state storage area 203k stores information indicating that the current game state is a big hit (during a big hit) (S814). The gaming state storage area 203k is configured to be able to divide and store the gaming state (normal state, positive change state, latent state) related to the lottery game and the gaming state related to the winning game (medium or medium jackpot) Yes, by executing the processing of S811, the gaming state (normal state, positive change state, latent state) regarding the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won, and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being stored .

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to determine the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot game.

  When the processing of S814 is finished, next, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the first special symbol is set (S815), and the first special symbol display device A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed at 37 is executed (S816), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol in the process of S801 (S801: No), the process of S802 to S814 is skipped and the above-described S815 is performed. Transfer to processing.

  As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209), processing (S812 to S816) is executed to stop the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game). In addition, if the current lottery result is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol in change is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out (S807). As described above, in the process of stopping and displaying one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot (determination display), the other special symbol in the process of moving is forcibly stopped at the same time. It is possible to execute appropriate processing for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed.

  That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the variation process for the first special symbol and the variation process for the second special symbol are sequentially performed, the process is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol By executing the second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) within the variation process for the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing at which the variation process for the second special symbol is not executed. Since it can be done, it is possible to prevent the processing for the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

  In this embodiment, one special symbol is configured to perform a process to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol indicating disengaging at the timing when the special symbol indicating a large hit is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a big hit, that is, when it is determined that the present lottery result is a big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) (for example, In S405 of FIG. 31 (Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly pulled out and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable that the special variation that does not win the jackpot be executed for the other special symbol that has been forcibly removed and stopped until the jackpot variation of the one special symbol ends. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won by one of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the presence or absence of the big hit.

  In addition, when controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, if it is during fluctuation (outlier fluctuation) to show that the lottery of the second special symbol is out, the lottery Discard the result and execute the forced stop process to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation, and within the fluctuation (circumstances fluctuation) to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is hit (big hit, small hit) In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is finished, while making the player interested in whether a new second special symbol variation is executed or the second special symbol variation being interrupted is resumed I can play a game. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the situation of the second special symbol (whether interrupted or not) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol variation start process (S212) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 29) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S212).

  When the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) performed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)). Determine whether or not the jackpot was won in)).

  If it is determined in the process of S901 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is selected. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this processing ends. That is, in this embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol and the second A new second special symbol variation is prohibited from being executed after the special symbol is removed and forced to be stopped and displayed with the symbol. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing relating to the first special symbol, the control processing can be executed without causing a problem.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to be OFF. Therefore, the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once by setting the special view 2 variation stop flag 203o.

  This is a lottery (first special symbol) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)) If the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) to be executed immediately after is skipped only when the jackpot is won in the large hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31)), then the first special symbol big hit The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), and the jackpot game is ended by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is not performed until it is performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, so the control process executed by main controller 110 Processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped with a missing symbol), and one of the special symbols is displayed. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set so that new fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol is not executed until the big hit game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, fluctuation processing of the other special symbol Although the structure which skips 1 time is used, you may use structures other than this.

  That is, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (big hit), the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) is not won until the big hit game based on the big hit is finished. For example, if the jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control unit 110 described later, the special figure 2 may be configured. The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be set to be off.

  By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, until the big hit game is executed It is possible to prohibit a new second special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed in a state where the special view 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol Although it is constituted so that processing may be skipped, ie, it does not start a new change (it keeps the 2nd special symbol stopped), it is not restricted to this, special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

  In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, the period until the specific timing in the jackpot game is reached Alternatively, the second special symbol may be variably displayed during the period until the end of the jackpot game. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

  In addition, the contents of the fluctuation processing about each special symbol mentioned above are configured to be outputted appropriately to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the contents, and the third symbol display device The variation display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display pattern of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above However, while forcibly stopping the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. If you do, use the third symbol or the fourth symbol that corresponds to the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and configure it to execute the fluctuation effect during forced stop Also good.

  In this way, using the respective symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) that are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the actual second special Even when the symbol is configured to execute the fluctuation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (S901: No), S903 to S909. The process of is executed, and this process ends. The processing of S903 to S909 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol holding with respect to each processing up to S301 to S307 of the above-described first special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 30). Ball number counter value (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, second special symbol big hit determination processing (S908), second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S909) The description is omitted because it is the same except for the changed point.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S 908) is the first special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol as opposed to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) described above. And other, some processing has been added.

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1001 corresponding to the processing of S401, the point that the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408 In the processing of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the processing of the point when the object is changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) and when the lottery result of the special symbol is out The difference is that the process to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process is executed (S1009), and this process is ended. Do.

  This special view 2 out-of-variation variation process (S1009) is a process that is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big hit, that is, the small hit or the small hit. Although the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, when the lottery result is out, the same process as the process of S409 of the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) is executed, If the lottery result is a small hit, a process corresponding to the small hit is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1009).

  In the special figure 2 out-of-range fluctuation process (S1009), first, whether the lottery result this time (the lottery result acquired by the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S905 in FIG. 36)) is a small hit Is determined (S1101).

  If it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103) Then, the small hitting symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S1101: No), the second special symbol out of the pattern displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The setting is made (S1105), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1009 in FIG. 38) executed as one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), that is, the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) The small hitting flag 203x is set to ON when it is determined that the small hitting is won in the process executed at the timing to start the setting situation of the small hitting flag 203x at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. The processing corresponding to the small hit can be easily executed based on the above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906) which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S212 in FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the first special symbol lottery result) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the second special symbol lottery result), and S506 to S507 It differs in the point that a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (a fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command in each processing of S906 to S907 corresponding to each processing up to. The other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S212 in FIG. 36), is a special pattern deviation variation pattern to be executed. The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be described.

  When the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is performed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37).

  If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hitting type, different small hitting types are not set based on the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table is provided in which different small hit types are defined for the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5, S1302 and S1303 Different small hit types may be selected according to the process of (1).

  After the process of S1303, the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the small fluctuation pattern selection table is read based on the read fluctuation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation pattern (small hitting variation pattern) of the image is selected (S1305). Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hitting fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out) (S1301: No), a process (S1307 to S1309) is executed when the lottery result is out. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming state is read (S1307), and a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308). The fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S213) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S213). The process for updating the variation of the second special symbol is executed, and when the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for resuming the variation is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S213), it is first determined whether the special view 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on (S1401). Special figure 2 Temporary stop flag 203j is on, that is, when it is determined that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), special figure 2 for resuming the fluctuation of the second special symbol A resume command is set (S1402), the special view temporary stop flag 203j is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (S1401: No), the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped, so the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

  After executing the processing of S1401 or S1403, next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S215) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S215). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S215), the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 33) , The point of having changed the contents of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit, the point of omitting the process of setting the flag for stopping the variation of the other special symbol, and the current lottery result is a big hit When it is determined that the above is not the case (S1501: No), it is different in that the special figure 2 off stop process (S1514) is executed. The other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, contents of the special figure 2 off stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 2 off stop processing (S1508). This special view 2 off stop process (S1508) is a special symbol variation that corresponds to the case where the lottery result acquired in the second jackpot determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than a jackpot (small hit or miss). The stop processing is executed, and the variation of the first special symbol is canceled (forced stop) or temporary stop processing is executed depending on the winning small hit type.

  When the special figure 2 stop processing (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON. (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type selected this time is the small hit A (S1602). If it is determined that the small hit type selected this time is the small hit A (S1602: Yes), processing for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether or not the first special symbol is in fluctuation (S1603). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set on (S1604), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is on. Is set (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), the first special symbol is not in fluctuation, so the processing of S1604 to S1605 is skipped and the processing of S1607 Migrate to

  In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit, and the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspension of the variation of the second special symbol according to the won small hit type) ) Or execute a process of forcibly stopping at the time of removal. If the small hit type selected as described above is the small hit A, the special view temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special view temporary stop command is displayed on the main processing of the main control unit 110 (FIG. 52). Is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S2401) executed in (see). And when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for showing that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has temporarily stopped (does it) A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special view 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit type won in the process of S1602 is not A (ie, it is the small hit B), the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606) is executed, and S1607 Transfer to processing.

  Here, the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606) which is one process of the special figure 2 stop processing (S1514 in FIG. 43) will be described with reference to FIG. In this special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), when the process of stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed, the variation result of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped when the variation result is small hitting B. Execute the process of

  In the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not a value larger than 0 (S1651: No), this processing is ended since it is not necessary to forcibly stop the first special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1651 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1652). This special view 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 described later. Then, when the special lamp 1 fluctuation stop command is received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is detached to indicate that the forced stop has occurred (done) (off) Are set on the third symbol display device 81, and are output to the display control device 114.

  Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process shifts to the process of S1656. In the process of S1656, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special view 1 is on (S1656). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is off (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set off (S1657), the storage information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203n is not on (S1656: No), the present processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the small hit B is won in the special figure 2 game, the special figure 1 variation being executed is configured to be forcibly stopped at a break. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player from winning a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player during the latent game, and to prevent losing the interest of the game, and a safe game can be provided.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and concurrently executable, as described above. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the symbol (big hit symbol) showing a big hit or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed by either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly forced. Although it was configured to stop and display with the out-of-hand symbol, it is not limited to that, and according to the jackpot type and the small hitting type won, the other special symbol is variably displayed in a state of interrupting temporary stop or measurement of fluctuation time. Configured. By configuring in this way, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in the display mode or the notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, so the player can play the lottery game during the variable display. It can be grasped that it has not disappeared, and a jackpot game can be played with ease.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined whether the ball has entered the ball (start winning) in any of the upper first entrance 64b1, the lower first entrance 64b2, and the second entrance 640. If you get a starting prize, each acquired up to the maximum number for holding (up to 4 pieces at the top first ball entry 64b1 and the bottom first ball entry 64b2 and 4 pieces at the second entrance 640) It is a process which stores a counter value in the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively.

  In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a process (so-called, pre-reading process) is executed to predict the success or failure judgment result, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance . Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 45) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first upper entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 as the first start opening (start winning). (S1701). Here, the entry of the ball into the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (there has been a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1 Is acquired (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

  That is, at this moment, whether the number of pending items for the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first incoming ball slot 64b2 is less than four, which is the upper limit value (that is, is the pending item count not stored to the upper limit value? Is determined. If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first starting opening (number of drawing rights held for the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls 203a (S1706).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1707). The first pre-reading process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the variation determination result and the variation pattern determined from the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A process of determining the type of stop, etc. is executed. Although the present embodiment is configured to execute processing for determining the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, the present invention is limited thereto. For example, when there is a new start winning combination, the variation determination result and the variation pattern determined for all the pending storage stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, You may comprise so that the process which discriminate | determines stop classification etc. may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although the content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, without being limited thereto, the lottery right of the second special symbol (winning information) is newly acquired when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. You may comprise so that the content of may be discriminate | determined beforehand.

  And if the process of S1707 is performed, the process of S1708 will be performed next. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (S1701: No), or the process at S1703, the current time is If it is determined that the number of held items for the 1 entrance ball slot 64b1 or the lower 1st entrance ball slot 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d And skip to the processing of S1708.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is added, the first pre-reading process (S1707) based on the information (winning information) related to the added winning is Although it is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, for example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S1703 (S1703 : No), that is, performing the first pre-reading process (S1707) when entering the ball into the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of holding balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit It may be configured to be able to. As a result, even in the state where the number of holding balls in the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play a game in order to execute the prefetching process. In addition, when adding the ball to the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 while the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, adding value may be given. Because it is possible, when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 while the number of holding balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the game intention is reduced Can be suppressed.

  Next, about each processing to S1708-S1714, the winning of a ball to the 1st starting opening (upper 1st ball entrance 64b1 or 1st lower ball entrance 64b2) performed by each processing to S1701-S1707 The same processing as the processing performed for the second embodiment is different from the processing performed for the second entrance 640, so the detailed description will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that it can win in small hitting by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, in the processing of S1713, the value of small hitting classification counter C5 is also acquired.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first prefetch process (S1707) which is one process of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first pre-reading process (S1707).

  In the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 46), first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch holding storage area (S1822).

  When it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1823 is a big hit (only a low probability state big hit, only a high probability state big hit, both a low probability state and a high probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating the winning condition (the gaming state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set is set (S1824), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1823 is not a big hit (a special symbol is out even in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the out is set. (S1825), this processing ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is added to the information (information giving different meaning based on the result of the result of the determination of the judgment) as the common information in addition to the information for indicating the result of the determination of the result of the judgment. It is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821. Then, the winning command set in the present processing is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S2401) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110.

  On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is different from the normal color) It is possible to execute an effect (prefetch effect) that is displayed variably) or indicates a notice symbol etc. before the start of fluctuation to suggest the result of the pass / fail judgment to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the prefetching process is performed, the judgment result of the success or failure in the high probability state of the special symbol and the judgment on the probability of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each discrimination However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even if the special symbol is in the high probability state or in the low probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit The first winning random number counter C1 may be defined, and a winning command indicating the jackpot of the special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read.

  By configuring in this way, a special prize symbol for which a pre-reading effect is not executed, since a winning command indicating a big hit will be output only when it is determined in advance that a specific big hit is made to the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of jackpot winning to fluctuation.

  Furthermore, the game state when the lottery of the special symbol based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state You may comprise so that a yes-no decision may be performed. In this case, instead of varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of holding balls, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the holding ball is started based on the information stored on hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, the prefetching process based on the prize information is executed, and during the prefetching process However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information (newly stored) is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110. Even if information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the pending storage) is set as a prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to predict the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the information included in the prize command received. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 side executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be performed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is good to constitute so that it may analyze (prediction of a judgment result of a decision). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, the specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of the success or failure) is not performed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from executing unnecessary control. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player illegally acquires the result of the pre-reading process performed without a title.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the second prefetch process (S1714) which is one process of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S1714). In the second pre-reading process (S1714 in FIG. 47), a ball enters the first starting opening (upper first ball entry port 64b1 or lower first ball inlet 64b2) in the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 46) described above. In contrast to the processing of performing various determinations by determining (prefetching) in advance pending data (winning information) based on the ball (start winning combination), the target to be determined is the starting winning combination at the first starting opening The only difference is that it is changed from the prize information on the basis to the prize information on the basis of the start prize in the second starting opening (the second entrance ball opening 640), and the other processes are the same. Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, normal symbol variation processing (S106) which is one of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric part 64a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S2001). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), after the display showing the hit on the second symbol display device 83 is made (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the opening and closing control of the electrically operated part 64a is performed. Medium (until the end of the hit game) is included. When it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is in progress (S2001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S2001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). If it is not during the normal symbol fluctuation display, that is, if it is determined that the current state is a state where it is possible to execute a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery draw) (S2002: No), then the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

  If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S2005). In other words, if it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning information to be used for the normal symbol variation is held on hold) is established in the process of S2004, it is reserved and stored. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning combination information, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set on. (S2008: Yes) acquires a yes / no determination result (lottery result) based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) for high probability, and shifts to the processing of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S2008: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 11C), the judgment result Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

  In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined that a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "o" is the hit time. The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern using the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (is out of place) (S2011: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S2014.

  Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (the process of S2014) will be described using the contents defined in the common drawing variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In this embodiment, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol variation is set to the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (generally reserved number of drawings), It is configured to be variably set based on. And according to the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, it is constituted so that the ease of entering of the ball to lower 1st ball entrance 64b2 may differ.

  As described above, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, a hit game based on an open pattern in which an open period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closed period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds A game per figure is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, because the game which has passed the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 and the game is over per common drawing, that ball Is configured such that it can not enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

  On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, different fluctuation time is set according to the number of holding balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f), If the number of balls in normal symbols is 0, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is defined as 30 seconds, and if the number of balls in normal symbols is 1 to 3, it is A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

  Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a hit game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds A game per figure is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is zero, the point at which the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2 (the through gate 67 Since the variation (30 seconds variation) of the normal symbol is being executed at 1.6 seconds after passing, it is configured so that the ball can not enter the lower first entrance 64b 2 In the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the point at which the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first entrance 64b2 ( At 1.6 seconds after passing through gate 67, the game is executed per common drawing, so that the ball is configured to be able to enter second ball entrance 640.

  As described above, according to the length of fluctuation time of the normal symbol set, it is possible to change the degree of ball entry into the lower first ball entry port 64b2, thereby the lower first ball entry port 64b2 Since the ease of entering the ball to the ball can be easily changed according to the gaming state, various game characteristics can be created.

  In addition, as described above, even if the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer, it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 even in a game state (for example, a positive change state) where it is necessary to reduce the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the gaming state of the normal symbol and the holding ball number of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, acquisition Different fluctuation times may be set based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the normal symbol this time is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol "o" is stopped (displayed on). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out, the “X” symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting display). That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the open / close control mode (open pattern) of the motorized role object 64a is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (is out) (S2017: No), the present processing ends.

  Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 64a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing (the timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011) at which the normal symbol judgment is performed. The probability of a normal symbol set at the timing (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the process of S2015) the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric character 64a by executing the normality judgment of the normal symbol The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 64a is set based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery processing) for the normal symbol and the variation processing (lottery processing) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing (for the special symbol ( The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) for the special symbol executed in parallel during the period when the variation process (lottery process) for the regular symbol is being executed, the normal symbol is determined at the timing of judging the success or failure of the regular symbol. The high probability state of is set, and the case where the low probability state of an ordinary symbol is set occurs at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized prize 64a.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of performing the normality judgment of the normal symbol, the open control mode (open When the pattern) is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the open pattern executed when the high-power state of the normal symbol is set is open (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) There was a problem that would be

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the open control mode (open pattern) of the motorized combination 64a is determined, and the motorized combination is determined based on the determination result. An opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a is set. As a result, the motorized role item 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the process of S2017, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), next, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol. If it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S2018) and the time saving flag 203m is not on (is off), that is, it is determined that the current state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No) As the open pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol, an open pattern "0.7 sec x 1 time" is executed which is executed once for 0.7 sec (S2019).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the short time flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), one open for 0.8 seconds is executed as an open pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. An open pattern “0.8 seconds × 1 time” is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern (0.8 seconds × 1 time) for the high probability state of the normal symbol is more than the open pattern (0.7 second × 1 time) for the low probability state of the normal symbol. The motorized rolepiece 64a is open for a long period of time. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as the opening pattern of the electric role item 64a, the hit game (the lower the probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous to the player than when the low probability state is set) The period during which the first ball entrance 64b2 is in the open state is extended.

  Next, based on the release pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020, the start of the open / close control of the motorized accessory 64a is set (S2021), and this process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normality decision of the normal symbol, the success or failure determination of the normal symbol is executed, and the open control mode of the motorized role 64a moved in the hit game of the normal symbol Although the open pattern of the motorized combination 64a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (open pattern), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the normal symbol judgment is performed The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing to set the release control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized role 64a to be moved in the hit game of the normal symbol Only when it is set, the electric combination 64a may be configured to open long, or it may be set at the timing when the normal symbol judgment is made. And based on the gaming state it is, may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric combination thereof 64a.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the common drawing is determined based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 from the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). As shown in FIG. 18, in the common pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. Except for the positive change state (positive change: presence of power supply), the change pattern is one type, and the same change time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected common drawing change type counter.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, the through gate passing process executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and it is determined whether or not the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 has passed, and the second hit occurs when the ball is passed. It is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102), If it is determined that the game is in the normal state (S2002: Yes), a right-handed game is performed while the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103) , S2106.

  When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the audio lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the emission abnormality is generated in the third symbol display device 81. A first anomaly notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is the latent It is determined whether it is in a definite state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and when it is determined that it is latent state (S2104: Yes), the second notification indicating a firing abnormality A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that it is not a definite change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106.

  Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 A second anomaly notification mode (not shown) indicating a launch anomaly is displayed.

  As described above, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, it is determined that the right hitting game is being performed by determining that the right hitting game is being executed. The manufacturing cost can be reduced because it is not necessary to provide dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the game area beyond the variable display device unit 80). In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the gaming state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. it can.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right hitting game is being executed, but the right hitting game is being executed Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with such an intensity (operation amount) that the ball is emitted to the right strike area May be provided.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the processes of S2103 to S2105 are finished, the process of S2106 is next executed. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then, the acquired value (M) of the acquired normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of holding balls of the ordinary symbol) Determines whether the upper limit value has been reached) (S2107).

  When it is determined in the process of S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 1 is added (S2108), the common drawing reservation ball number command (command to show the value (M) of the normal pattern holding ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is common The symbol holding ball storage area 203c is stored (S2110), and this processing is ended.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305). If not stored (S2305: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S2312 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S2312. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2313, S2314) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up process, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S2313, S2314), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S2305: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S2304: Yes) S2307: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S2308). Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S2309), and the process shifts to the processing of S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S2311). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 52), first, during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29), control of output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled on the sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, an award corresponding to the winning ball number is given to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) or the start winning process (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set by various processes of the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control unit 113 by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 52), and various kinds of symbols displayed on the third symbol display unit 81 The information (variation effect, decoration effect, etc.) is set as information for setting. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is used when the special symbol is in the big hit state. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 is executed (S2404).

  Detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, but in this jackpot control process (S2404), the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning for each round of the jackpot state Open the device 650 (hereinafter referred to as the winning opening etc.), or the maximum opening time of the winning opening etc (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) has elapsed, or the winning opening etc (left variable winning device 65) It is determined whether the ball has won a predetermined number of times in the right variable winning device 650). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening etc. (the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening etc. (the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650) are repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the small hitting control processing concerning the small hitting game which is executed when winning in the small hitting with the drawing of the special symbol is executed (S2405). In this small hitting control process (S2405), for the right variable winning device 650 which is opened during the small hitting game, a scenario in which the period for opening the V winning opening 650a and the period for closing the same are determined in advance ( Processing for setting based on the small hit scenario is performed. The detailed contents of the small hitting control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a motor-operated article opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motor-operated article 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (S2406). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized winning combination is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), according to the variation pattern The variable display is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) ends. Then, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 34). In the display mode set in S507 of (refer to), the stop symbol (the first symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Also in the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (disappeared symbol) indicating the removal. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S2014 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S2016 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device Ends the fluctuation display and displays the stop symbol (the second symbol) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see FIG. 48) ( Turn on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S2410) If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described S2401 and subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S2410: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2411, S2412).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2411 (S2412). Note that, in the process of S2412, the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated as in the case of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is executed that the illegal game aimed at the timing when the determination value corresponding to the win is acquired It can be suppressed.

  Further, in the process of S2409, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 50 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S 2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S2413), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2415), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2409 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S2401. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S2401. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

  In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is the timing at which the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If it is, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is ended.

  Note that the opening command may be transmitted in a delayed (variable) manner according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then, the opening counter has a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B) If it does, an opening command may be sent. By doing in this way, for example, when it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game, time to the start of the big hit is lengthened, when it becomes a big hit in the right hitting game, time to the beginning of the big hit It can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the left hitting game, it is necessary to switch to the right hitting game as the big hit game. According to the above configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the time for switching to the right hitting game (big hit game) when it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), it is next determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is currently being played (S2503). In the process of S2503, the discrimination is performed by reading out the gaming information on the winning game stored in the gaming state storage area 203k.

  As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is determined in the process of S2503 that the jackpot of the special symbol is not inside (S2503: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S2503: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

  When it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 54. However, the process corresponding to the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, and switching An operation process of the member 650h is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of jackpots to be started this time among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the jackpots of this time is opened first The operation scenario is read (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow passage solenoid (probable change solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). Thereafter, the process ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation on the first attacker (right variable winning device 650) as a big hit game and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) The jackpot game (round game) for executing the opening operation is configured to be executable, and the process of S2642 described above is a part of the round game for opening the first attacker (right variable winning device 650), Only the opening operation scenario corresponding to the first round game is specified. Therefore, when executing a round game other than that, a scenario in which the flow channel solenoid (probable change solenoid) 650k is opened in the corresponding open operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved and the special discharge flow channel 650e2 is communicated) Is not defined, the process of S2642 is skipped.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed. Further, although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S 2504 in FIG. 55: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the progress status with respect to the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 what round game is currently being played in the round game.

  In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control unit 110, the round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started without any trouble. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game, and the number of round games played this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side is May be calculated, and the display mode of the number-of-rounds display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. By configuring in this manner, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so the load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Referring back to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 (S2506). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). The start timing of the ending effect is the end of the final round in the jackpot game (the second round in the case of jackpot A) and the open / close door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment) which is the balling time When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S2510), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2509: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S2511). The end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the ending effect set. When it is determined in the process of S2511 that the end timing of the big hit (the end timing of ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the big hit end process for setting the end of the big hit is executed (S2512), this processing Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the big hit end (S2511), the present process is finished as it is.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), the value of the probability variation counter is updated, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set according to the jackpot type won, or the high probability state of the ordinary symbol based on the jackpot type won. The process of setting or is executed.

  When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is 3 (S2701). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), since the probability variation number is the upper limit of 3, the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m are set to OFF (S2702). The value of the number counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating the change of the gaming state is set (S2709), and this processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is over, a definite change state or a latent state is set up to three times, and when the number of times reaches three times, the gaming state becomes the normal state. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the three-time positive change or the latent game with confidence. In the present embodiment, the number of definite variations is set to three, but the number is not limited to five and may be updated at random. By configuring in this way, various game characteristics can be provided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2701 that the value of the probability variation counter 203h is not 3 (that is, 2 or less), it is not the timing at which the probability variation ends, so the value of the probability variation counter 203h is incremented by one. (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type that has been won this time is A (S2705). When it is determined that the jackpot type of this time is A (S2705: Yes), in order to set the probability change state as the gaming state, the time saving flag 203m and the probability change flag 203g are set to ON (S2706), and S2709 mentioned above Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), the short time flag 203m is set to off (S2707) and the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S2705) in order to set the latency state as the gaming state. S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is performed, and the process ends.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S2405). This small hitting control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hitting state of the special symbol, for performing various effects according to the small hitting It is a process for setting information (command) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650.

  In the small hitting control process (S2405), first, it is judged whether it is a small hitting start timing (S2801). If it is the small hitting start timing (S2801: Yes), the small hitting opening command is set (S2802), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the small hitting start (S2801: No), it is determined whether the small hitting is in progress (S2803). If it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S2803: Yes), the control for the small hit does not need to be executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation of the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). When it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the on state of the opening solenoid is set (S2805), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the small hitting end (S2806). If it is determined that it is the small hitting end timing (S2806: Yes), the small hitting flag 203x is set to OFF (S2807), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the small hitting end (S2806: No), this processing is ended.

<About the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4116 (see FIG. 58) is performed by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 58, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4116 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see S4113 of FIG. 58). The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4116 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S4116 after a momentary power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S4117. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 to initialize the RAM 223.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is performed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is performed, the process of S4008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). And set the interrupt permission (S4011), and shift to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, that the start processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was performed last time (S4101), and one or more milliseconds If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S4102 to S4110, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), a command to transmit various commands to the display control apparatus 114, set in the processes of S4103 to S4113, to the display control apparatus 114 Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4111), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special view from the main control unit 110 Whether or not 1 fluctuation pattern command is received it decides (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. The details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 or not. (S4203). In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and the present process is ended. The details of the special view 2 variation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 71) When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol In the case of

  When it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received next It is determined whether or not (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process ends. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: No), has the ball number command for holding balls been received from the main control device 110? It discriminates (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the holding ball number process (S4208) is executed, and the present process is ended. Details of the holding ball number process (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined in the process of S4209 that a winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), information on the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing ends. .

  If it is determined in the process of S4209 that no winning information command has been received (S4209: No), it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. The details of the state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, definite change state, latency) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 A process of setting the sub game setting area 223 k is executed for the certain state) and the winning game state (medium hit, small hit).

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S4211 that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213), the fluctuation stop process is executed (S4214), and this process is ended. The detailed description of the fluctuation stop process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110 The process for setting the display aspect of the fluctuation production using the 4th and the 4th design is executed.

  In this embodiment, as a period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is performed, but in the variation pattern set in advance. Even while special symbol variations are being executed based on processing, there may be cases where processing is performed to forcibly stop special symbol variations according to the results of other special symbol variations. Therefore, the variation stop process (S4214) is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be stopped corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. This makes it possible to synchronize the variation status of the special symbol and the status of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide a display aspect that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the variable stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop related command has been received (S4215) and the temporary stop related command has been received. If it is determined (S4215: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but the effect display corresponding to the temporary stop relation to be executed when the jackpot or small hit is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol. A process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute is performed.

  In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received (S4217), and it is determined that the hit related command has been received. (S4217: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4218), and this process is ended. The details of the win-related processing (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the effect corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when winning a big hit or a small hit as a result of the drawing of the special symbol. A process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received (S4217: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4219), and the present process is ended. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment has been described above, but in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining presence / absence of reception for various commands An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether a state command has been received may be either a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The determination order may be defined to be executed prior to the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

  By configuring in this manner, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 of FIG. 30) of main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, and a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then a state command indicating that the gaming state has been varied is set. Also, the gaming state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special view 1 fluctuation pattern command.

  Therefore, for example, in the case where the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, and the latency state is set during the jackpot variation, the latency state is set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a fluctuation effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command that causes a jackpot fluctuation in a state where it is determined that it has been done.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the variation pattern command is performed at the previous stage of the determination processing of the state command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned big hit variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is first received, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. By delaying the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set as described above, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem arises of giving.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 110 executes processing for changing the gaming state after the determination of the jackpot and the change pattern setting, while the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. On the side, the process of determining the current gaming state is executed first, and thereafter, the variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed although the latent state is set.

  Further, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202). This special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state set. In response, processing is performed to set a display mode (main variation fluctuation pattern, secondary variation fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the display control device 114 generates the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) will be described.

  First, when the special figure 1 change start process is set. The special pattern 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k is read out to determine whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, positive change state) (S4304: No), the first special symbol is displayed in a variation display mode, so that the special state is selected. A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern in FIG. 1 is set (S4305), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), it is the gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main (the first special symbol Since the variable display is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating a special figure 1 secondary fluctuation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special view 2 change start process (S4204). This special view 2 variation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is set to the gaming state set. In response to this, processing is performed to set a display mode (a variation pattern for main variation, a variation pattern for secondary variation) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the display control device 114 generates the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and a detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a ( S4353).

  Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4354). If it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not in the latent state (normal state, positive change state) (S4354: No), the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display mode, so it is a special game state. A display command indicating the sub-variation pattern is set (S4355), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is in the latent state (S4354: Yes), the second special symbol is in the gaming state where the variation display is main (the first special symbol variation display Is a subordinate game state), a display command indicating a special figure 2 main variation pattern is set (S4356), and this processing is ended.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (parallel), both special symbols are executed. Each special symbol (the first symbol according to the gaming state being set while simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (the third symbol and the fourth symbol variation display) corresponding to the variation display of the symbol display device 81 on the third symbol display device 81 By variably setting the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence or absence of the display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation situation (lottery result and the number of times of fluctuation) The player can easily recognize the special symbol type to be watched.

  Therefore, even when a game specification in which a plurality of special symbol types execute fluctuation (lottery) simultaneously (in parallel) is used, it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

  Next, stop type command reception processing (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4206). The stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special view 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special view 2 is selected. When the stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or special view 2 stop type command (S4402), and this processing is ended.

  The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change simultaneously, it becomes possible to manage the stop type respectively, and execute appropriate change display Can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, contents of the number-of-held-balls process (S4208) executed in the command determination process (S4151 of FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the number-of-held-balls processing (S4208). In the holding ball number process (S4208), when the gaming state is the latent state, a process for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed.

  When the holding ball number process (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the received command (holding ball number command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the holding ball number counter (the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

  In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is latent (S4503). If it is determined that the state is not latent (in the normal state or in the positive change state) (S4503: No), the processing associated with the other holding balls is executed (S4509), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in the state of latency (S4503: YES), it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223j is ON (S4504). The right-handed flag 223j is set on in the jackpot related processing (S5002) in the hit related processing (S4218), and the holding ball of the first special symbol is set during the jackpot ending in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over. When it is determined that there is a flag, it is a flag for setting a dash mode that urges the player to play a right-handed game. When it is determined in the process of S4504 that the right-handed flag 223j is not on (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4504 that the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), the dash end flag 223q is set to ON (S4506) because it is the timing to end the dash mode (S4506), and the right-handed flag 223j Is set to OFF (S4507), and the processing associated with the other holding balls is executed (S4508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol holding ball number is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processing is executed (S4508), and this processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, when in the latent state, the player is notified that there is a holding ball in the first special symbol using the dash mode, but according to the state of the first special symbol, The special figure 2 game may be displayed more emphatically. Specifically, the display mode of the right-handed display may be changed in accordance with the gaming state such as the first special symbol being non-fluctuating, out-of-fluctuating, or jackpot fluctuating, and the like. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to play the special figure 2 game.

  Next, referring to FIG. 64, state command processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4212). This state command processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the first one is made according to the set gaming state. 3 is to execute processing for setting the display modes displayed on the symbol display device 81 differently. The details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described below.

  When state command processing (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set gaming state is to be changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k is different from the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

  If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the gaming state after change is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state The setting command is set (S4603), the display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), and the information indicated by the state command received this time is stored (set) in the slave state setting area 223k (S4610). finish.

  Here, when the command set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, the fluctuation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode and background) are set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With this configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variation effect display for the gaming state set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a change pattern command (common command) corresponding to the change display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114 The display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received fluctuation pattern based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common It can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the case where display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining the plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side as described above, It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of display data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 is appropriate. There is provided a judgment means for judging whether there is any, and when it is judged that the judgment result is not appropriate, a simple display fluctuation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of display data already set are displayed. It may be configured to be rewritten to simple display data.

  By configuring in this way, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113. It is possible to display a fluctuation effect display based on the simple display data. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to be played by the change effect display of contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the above-mentioned simple display data, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode of black background) which does not correspond to any gaming state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol Such display data may be used which has a smaller amount of data than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. The voice lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. It may be configured to

  Referring back to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the gaming state after change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the gaming state after change is If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (the state command received this time is the command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. Set the main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (S4606), set the display command indicating the super mode (S4607), It transfers to the process of S4610.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the gaming state after the change is not the latent state (not the command indicating the state command latent state received this time), that is, the state command indicating the definite variation state is received (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the definite variation state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the challenge mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to the above-described S4610.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the variation stop process (S4214) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process (S4214). This fluctuation stop process (S4214) sets the display mode when the fluctuation stop related command (the command set when it is stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of other special symbol lottery) from the main control device 110 is set Processing is performed.

  When the fluctuation stop process (S4214) is executed, first, it is judged whether the special view 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special view 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special view 2) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (refer to S215 in FIG. 42) of the main control device 110 Command (see S1503 in FIG. 42).

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the special view 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (super mode is being executed) If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S4702: Yes), a display command for subtractive variation stop is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for the sub fluctuation stop is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the detachment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that it is not in the latent state (S4702: No), a display command for fluctuation stop corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process shifts to the process of S4705. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the special view 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4705.

  Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command received this time is the special view 2 fluctuation stop command (S4705). This special view 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special view 1) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main control device 110. Command (see S806 in FIG. 34).

  If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), it is next determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (super mode is being executed) If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main change is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that it is not in the latent state (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the follow change is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating detachment. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special view 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to S4709.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the determination related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the determination related processing (S4216). In this determination related processing (S4216), when the determination command of the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the dash mode, and the processing to end the dash mode is executed.

  In the determination related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special view 1 determination command from the main control device 110, it determines whether it is the end timing of the dash mode. If it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of the dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set off (S4753), and this processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4751 that the dash end flag 223q is not on (S4751: No), the process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218). In this temporary stop related process (S4218), a process for determining the remaining time of the special view fluctuation time when the temporary stop command is received, and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 when the 1 fluctuation restart command is received. A process of setting (additional effect) is performed.

  When temporary stop related processing (S4218) is executed, it is first determined whether a special view temporary stop command has been received (S4801), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4801: Yes) The stop flag 223m is set to on (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern currently set is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 5 seconds (S4804: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. Sets a remaining period A indicating a short time (S4805), and shifts to the processing of S4809.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or more) (S4804: No), the remaining fluctuation period is 5 seconds or more and more than 60 seconds. If it is determined that there is less (S4806) and it is determined that it is 5 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), the remaining time information storage area 223p shows a period B indicating that it is a normal remaining fluctuation time. The setting is made (S4807), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4809.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4806 that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808) , S4809. As described above, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special drawing fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special drawing fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special drawing fluctuation time is interrupted) By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of resuming the special figure fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) to be set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is made different corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation is resumed. Although the configuration is as described above, without limitation thereto, for example, the period A is more easily selected as the remaining time is shorter, and the selection ratio of each period information so that the period C is more easily selected as the remaining time is longer. May be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining periods may be divided at predetermined time intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and the periods A to C may be ordered and distributed to each of the divisions. You may.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect performed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining fluctuation time, and the remaining fluctuation Can provide fun predicting time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the processing of S4802 to S4808 described above is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed (S4810) It transfers to the process of S4816) and S4817. After executing any of the processes of S4813, S4815, and S4816, or if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has not been received in the process of S4809 (S4809: No), the restart process (S4817) is performed. Execute and complete this process.

  Next, the contents of the restart processing (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4817). This restart process (S4817) is a process of setting an effect to be executed when a special view 1 restart command is received.

  When restart processing (S4817) is executed, it is first determined whether the special view temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and when the special view temporary stop flag is determined to be off (S4901: No) , End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S4902). If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), the special view temporary stop flag is set to off (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read out. (S4904) A fluctuation pattern is determined from the restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and a display restart fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process proceeds to the processing of S4908. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4902 that the special view 1 restart command is not received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4908.

  In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), this process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4908 that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 restart command has been received (S4909). If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4909: Yes), next, the special view 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read (S4911) A fluctuation pattern is determined from the restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a display restart fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation resumes after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished in the present embodiment. In the period until it is performed, the swing effect for displaying the third symbol is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is performed. Although configured as described above, any other configuration may be used.

  For example, there is provided an effect period determination means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed, and when the effect period determination means determines that the normal effect period is over, the additional effect is executed. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously performed, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Moreover, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after resumption, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Or, a swing effect may be performed to swing and display the third symbol. Furthermore, an error period determination means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determination means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the hit related process (S4220) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4220). In this winning related processing (S4220), to make the third symbol display device 81 effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when winning a big hit or a small hit as a result of the lottery of special symbols The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a jackpot or a jackpot is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. A process of setting a display award ball number command based on the result is executed.

  In the hit related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot related command (S5001). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot related processing is executed (S5002), and then the present processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot related processing (S5002) which is one of the processing in the hit related processing (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether or not the hit related command received by the win related process (S5001 in FIG. 69) is a jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S5102), and then the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the big hit start command has not been received (S5101: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S5104), and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the round number command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In the case where information for indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted as a round update command from the main control unit 110 in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit The round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of round update commands received is provided in the RAM 223 of the 113 when the round update command is received, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the number of display rounds command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the process proceeds to S5106.

  In the process of S5106, it is determined whether the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) If it is determined that there is (YES at S5106), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right hitting flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), including dashes An ending command is set (S5109), and then the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a small hit related command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S5003: Yes), a small hit related process (S5004) is executed, and then this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the small hit related process (S5004) which is one process in the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process (S5004). In the small hit related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is a small hit start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the small hitting start command has been received (S5201: Yes), a small hitting start command for display is set (S5202), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the received command is not a small hit start command (S5201: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5203: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5203: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5204), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), it is then determined whether a winning ball command has been received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a winning ball command (S5005: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a winning ball command (S5005: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the winning ball number counter (not shown) (S5006), A display award ball number command corresponding to the value of the award ball number counter after the addition is set (S5007), and then the process ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state or the positive change state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64). The number of winning balls corresponding to the received number of balls command is accumulated by the number-of-winning balls counter. Then, during the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) or during the latent state, the number of winning balls according to the accumulated value of the number of balls counter is displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is easy for the player to understand the total number of balls acquired during the period (the advantageous continuation period) from the setting of the latent state to the setting of the normal state (positive change state) again. It can be informed.

  In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration is configured to be displayed during the advantageous duration, but the player can be notified of the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration. The configuration may be such that, for example, the number of winning balls obtained in the jackpot game and the number of winning balls obtained in the small hitting game may be divided and displayed during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning gaming state (large hit, small hitting) at the time of receiving the winning ball command is determined based on the information set in the sub-status setting area 223k, and the number of winning balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to provide means. This makes it possible to easily divide the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration.

  Furthermore, the number of winning balls acquired in one game period (a period in which the jackpot game period is combined with the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous duration period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing, as history information, the cumulative number of winning balls acquired in one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

  In addition, as described above, when using a configuration in which the number of winning balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit, small hit) which becomes advantageous to the player. , Or may be configured to display the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous duration, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous duration, and the game is actively played Can be done.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured to continue unless the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the latent state is set, and the small hit game is performed during the latent state. It is configured to be easy to be hit (special figure 2 lottery is easy to be executed). Therefore, in addition to winning the jackpot in which the advantageous duration is set again during the advantageous duration, the player is expected to play the game with an expectation that the state in which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time. It will be done.

  In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is for the jackpot probability and the small jackpot probability preset in the pachinko machine 10 It is good to be configured to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the jackpot winning probability set in advance, the number of small hitting games executed during the latent state increases, and many winning balls And the actual small hit probability is higher than the preset small hit probability, the number of small hits played during the latent state increases, and many balls are won If so, the player can analyze in a distinguishable manner. Therefore, by causing the player to analyze the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the game contents interested and make it easier to continuously play the game.

  Furthermore, when the game content (lottery result of the special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided to execute condition achievement notification for indicating that, for example, a jackpot is won The condition achievement notification may be executed to show that the special symbol lottery number (so-called, number of incidents) executed until then exceeds the predetermined number (100 times), or it is executed during the small hitting win A condition achievement notification may be executed to show that the special symbol lottery number (lottery number of the special figure 2) exceeds a predetermined number (10 times). In addition, a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of winning balls acquired in one game pattern has exceeded a predetermined number (5000).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4112). The variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the fluctuation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is the first or special view 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the fluctuation display effect in the third symbol display device 81. Based on the display, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit D), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to S5305. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to be off (S5302).

  Then, in the process of S4302 of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 of FIG. 59), the fluctuation extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received from main controller 110 Set the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the variation pattern related to the effect (S5303), subtract 1 from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (S5304), 2 Move to the processing of S5305 for setting the variable display regarding the special symbol (special figure 2).

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 58) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113. Ru. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed on the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the gaming state.

  Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 in FIG. 72 will be described. The processing of S5305 to S5308 is different from the processing of S5301 to S5304 in FIG. 72 described above in that the type of the special symbol to be targeted is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, Are identical. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  When the process of S5305 is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5305), and when it is determined that it is not set on (S5305: No), the process of S5309 Transition to On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5305 that it is set to ON (S5305: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5306), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command, the second The variation pattern command for display of the special symbol is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S5308), and the process proceeds to 5309.

  In the process of S5309, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5309), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5309) : No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5309: Yes), the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S5310), and the extracted stop type Is set as it is (S5311), the special view 1 for display or the special view 2 stop type command is set (S5312), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win the lottery result (for example, a small hit or transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player) which is advantageous to the player.

  Then, the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is easy to be executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and the second special symbol is configured when the specific first gaming state (for example, the latent state) is set. In the first gaming state, when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol lottery, the first gaming state is set again.

  Furthermore, in order to facilitate the drawing of the second special symbol during the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is also the case where the normal state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, is set. Also, since the lottery of the second special symbol becomes executable, the fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes) is set to suppress that the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed in the normal state. Are configured to be

  However, in the gaming machine configured in this manner, although the efficiency is low, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed during the normal state, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that gives the player an advantage is given.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery in the state where the normal state is set, the forced stop or the temporary stop is caused outside the second special symbol lottery In the state where the normal state is set, it is set so that it is difficult for the second special symbol to be won by the jackpot.

  In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device, and after the jackpot game is finished The high probability state of the symbol may be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, latent state, positive change state) can be set as gaming states, but four game states which can be set (normal state, latent state) It may be a definite change state, a short time state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), or two or less.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be simultaneously executable, and the second special symbol lottery that is easy to win in a small hit is a specific gaming state Although it is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), other configurations may be used, for example, the first ball entry port 64 is provided in the left side area, and the motorized role piece 640a is provided in the right side area. In order to be the most advantageous game for the player to play the right-handed game when there is a first ball entrance attached and a second entrance 640 not provided with the electric role product 640a and the probability change state is set You may configure it.

  When configured in this manner, during the normal state, as in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set so that the fluctuation time shorter than the special figure 2 fluctuation can be easily set, and during the latent state As in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is set so that the variation time shorter than the special figure 1 variation is easier to be set, and in the positive change state and the short time state, the motorized part 640a is opened. It should be set to be easy.

  In this way, during the normal state, play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol by left-handling game, and during time saving state, by the right-handed game, lottery of the first special symbol more efficiently than during normal state Play a game aiming for a big hit, and during a definite change state, with a right-handed game, with a higher probability than in a normal state, efficiently perform a lottery for the first special symbol to play a game aiming for a big hit, During the state, it is possible to play a game aiming for a jackpot or a small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S6001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the image at power on (the main image at power on or the fluctuation image at power on) (not shown) is drawn simply. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing (S6405). The variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S650. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S6406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a command for the number of rounds (S6410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display is performed. If there is a fluctuation stop command for use (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the variable stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80 (a) is a flowchart showing the variable stop command process. This fluctuation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control unit 110 The display stop command (output from the voice lamp control device 113) at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command) The normal display command and the various display commands set in the variable lamp processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113 are shown.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel) and additionally When one special symbol is displayed as a stop (confirmed) with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit), the other special symbol in change is ended with a predetermined change pattern (change time) Regardless of the presence or absence of the symbol, it is configured to be stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the detachment forcibly.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when the variation of the special symbol is forcibly stopped from the main control device 110, by executing the variation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced display) for variably displaying the display pattern of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display to correspond to the display pattern of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed) (forced display) It is configured to set the stop command.

  In the present embodiment, even if the normal stop command described above has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forcible stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed prior to the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control contents of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuating stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 65), and the display command indicating this temporary stop When (display temporary stop command) is received, a data table in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped is slightly rocked is set as the variable stop display data is determined.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233 b and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (see S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the variable stop command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display information command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the notification command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. The notification command process is to execute a process corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal conditions set in the main control device 110. This processing is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

  In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set to 233 d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it temporarily receives related commands such as a light emission command other than a display command, an audio output command, and a bonus feature drive command, and the processing of the display control device 114 The related command may be output to the corresponding control device in a state in which the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in the above is added.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear surface image determination flag 233x provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is set on The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, RAM type that specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, and further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image Specify the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear surface image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command For example (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)) which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S7301).

  In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S7203, the process proceeds to S7205.

  At S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less along with the end of the fixed display effect, so a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7217), and the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S7221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7602 (S7602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S7603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S7705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7706 (S7706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the process moves to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and then provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state among the back image discrimination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer object image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 7802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variable display is being executed, another variable display may be configured to be infeasible. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as composition which carries out change display in order from a holding ball with which a starting winning combination is temporally old. By configuring in this way, control can be simplified, and processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol) Four game states are provided: state), short time state (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state and normal symbol normal state) There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

Regarding Modification of First Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, the second special symbol is configured to be easily executed when the latent state is set, and when the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, The second special symbol of the second special symbol by making a forced stop in the display mode shown by showing the first special symbol in change out, or temporarily interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time (until the small hitting game is over). Although it was constituted so that a lottery might be performed easily, not only it but the following composition may be sufficient.

  The jackpot probability of the special symbol is always constant regardless of the gaming state, and the first ball entry which becomes the fluctuation trigger of the first special symbol is disposed at the position where the left-handed game ball can enter the ball, the right-handed The first right ball entry corresponding to the first special symbol and the second right ball entry corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in the area where the game ball can enter the ball, and the second right ball enters the right In the mouth, when the game ball passes through the through gate through which the right-handed game ball can pass, the game ball is opened to the right second ball entrance by making it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. Arrange and configure features.

  In the normal gaming state (low probability, non-power support (normal symbol probability is low probability)), the game ball is made to enter the first ball entry port to play the game with a left strike, and the first special symbol Make a lottery and play a game. The first special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the probability of a normal symbol becomes high probability after a big hit game, and when it becomes a short game state (playing state with power support) when the electric role is likely to be open, it is right It becomes possible to play the game by entering the game ball in the first right ball entrance and the second right ball entrance by performing the, and the lottery game of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed simultaneously It will be possible to In the second special symbol, the probability of winning in a small hit is set higher than the first special symbol, and a small winning game in which the V prize device formed in the variable prize device in the V prize area is opened is executed It is easily configured. In addition, when small hitting B (small hitting A and small hitting B are set), the 1st special symbol in fluctuation is forced to end (forced to the judgment result of falling off) when constitution is executed It is done.

  Here, in the modification, the jackpot game executed by the game ball passing through the V winning area by the small hitting game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed by the jackpot of the first special symbol. Becomes a jackpot is set. Here, the jackpot that is executed by the game ball passing the V prize area is set such that the selection ratio of the jackpot for which the short time gaming state is set after the jackpot game is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. The number of rounds may be set to be larger than the jackpot of the first special symbol so that the jackpot executed by passing through the V prize area may be advantageous.

  As described above, even in the so-called 1-type / 2-type game machine, the special symbol on which the jackpot fluctuation which is disadvantageous to the player is executed is based on the small hit or jackpot of the other special symbol. By forcing the game to come off and stop, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be awarded a favorable jackpot.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 It is different.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the winning jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot A winning only in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set a definite change state after the end of the jackpot game, jackpot B, jackpot C is set the latent state after the jackpot game end Be done. And, the jackpot D which is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured such that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, as described above, in the first embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) simultaneously (in parallel) executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol And, if the player wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, discard the first special symbol lottery according to the small hit type (forced stop by removal) or, interrupted (temporary stop) Are configured to

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of the jackpot type of winning, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol, the positive change state is set after the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the definite change state, the latent state is set as the game state at the start of the change, and the small hit game (small hit RUSH) is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of games in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, either the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts (see FIG. 88C), and either In the period until the big hit game of the special symbol of is executed (the symbol determination period), the latent state is set.

  Then, in the state in which the latent state is set, the game for performing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, if you win the small hit of the special figure 2 during the symbol change of the special figure 1, during the small hitting game is executed, interrupt the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 (temporary stop), or , It is configured to discard (forced stop at the disconnection). In addition, in the second embodiment, different fluctuation times are easily set according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Therefore, depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, the small hit of the second special symbol may not be able to interrupt or discard the jackpot fluctuation. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the period in which the latent state is set, and thus desires that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period be selected.

  As shown with reference to FIG. 88, when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the screen notifying the player that the game state will be the probability change state (challenge mode) at the end of the jackpot is displayed. 3 Display on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88 (a)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89 (a), the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 89 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment of "challenge mode entry !!" indicating that the positive change state is set after the jackpot game is displayed is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which a probability change state or a latent state is set is displayed. The character 811 is configured so as not to appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is required to display the period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The game state that is advantageous to the game state (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  In addition, a comment of “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming to set the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Furthermore, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the characters "left strike" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play the left strike game. This makes it possible to easily grasp that the player plays the left side game aiming at the left side area when the probability change state is set.

  In the small display area Dm1, “555” is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the displaying of the ending screen). In addition, "-" is displayed on the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variation display mode which shows that the 2nd special symbol is not fluctuatingly displayed. And in the small display area Dm1a and the small display area Dm2a, "0" indicating that there is no holding ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed respectively.

  Referring back to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. In the state where the probability change state is set as the game state (see FIG. 88 (b)), it becomes a game state in which it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by the left hitting game. That is, since the high probability state of the symbol is normally set in the positive change state, the electric character 64a is easily released, and the ball is easily inserted into the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the definite variation state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content of the display screen in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), a comment of "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a definite change state is displayed on the sub display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (right to left) Ru.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect of moving (running) the character 811 in the lateral direction (left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a small display area Dm1 is displayed with a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing. In addition, also at this time, since the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (b) (because the ball is not entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game) The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the definite variation state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the definite variation state Is set to make the operation display pattern of the character 811 different. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is won in the jackpot during the definite change state.

  Referring back to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89 (b) is displayed, the display shown in FIG. 90 (a) is performed when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probability change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state is changed at the timing (see FIG. 88 (c)) at which the variable display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the jackpot during the definite change state is started. It is configured to shift from the definite change state to the latent state.

  Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state (latency state) for the player at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode (the display mode of "333") of the effect pattern 816 for showing that the gaming state has shifted to the player is stopped and displayed. . As a result, it is possible for the player to think that the game state has shifted from the probability change state to the latent state by the stop display of the effect symbol 816. Further, in the second embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode stopped and displayed is a lottery result of the special symbol. It can be considered as a display mode of Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “RUSH rush !! Please hit right !!” is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the production symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped without changing the presentation mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of variation of the first special symbol winning the jackpot. Since the display is made, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbols.

  And, when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state where the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the big hit of the first special symbol), it was shown in FIG. 90 (b) As shown in the figure, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won the small hit. Here, the display content in the case where the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 90 (b), in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), if the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small display area Dm1 is changing. 1 "541" showing the display mode to indicate that the variation of the special symbol has been discarded (forced stop at the out) is displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 indicates that the small hit is won. The display mode “246” is displayed. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm7, “V × 3” indicating that the small win is won three times is displayed as a display mode indicating the cumulative winning number of small hits, and in the small display area Dm8, this latency state The elapsed time "01: 50 (1 minute 50 seconds)" after "" is set is displayed.

  Then, the treasure box 817 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for showing a small hit is displayed as an effect pattern 818 for showing the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the player can win the small hit with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

  In addition, a star mark 819 is displayed around the effect pattern 818. The star mark 819 is a display mode indicating that the jackpot is forced to stop out of the jackpot fluctuation in which the jackpot game which is disadvantageous to the player is executed by the small jackpot selection of this time. By configuring in this manner, the player can obtain a sense of relief and can concentrate more on right-handed gaming.

  In the second embodiment, the star 819 is displayed to indicate the variation result of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the presentation symbol is displayed to indicate the variation result of the first special symbol. 818 may be displayed as variable. Further, not only the variation result but also the remaining variation period of the discarded first special symbol may be displayed. By configuring in this manner, various effects can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner during the latent state, the contents of the effect can be changed depending on the state such as the first special symbol being non-fluctuating You may For example, the color of the guidance display of "right-handed" in the small display area Dm3 may be changed or blinked. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a game that is more understandable to the player.

  In the second embodiment, the right second variable winning device 650, which is pivoted when the player wins a small hit, is provided in the right area, and the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state is provided. It is configured to play a game. By configuring in this manner, even if the small hitting game is frequently executed during the latent state, it is sufficient for the player to continue the right-handed game, thus providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot fluctuation start, and the latent In the state where the definite state is set, it is constituted so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed efficiently.

  Therefore, it is configured to notify the player of a period in which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (see FIG. 90 (a)). ))reference. However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment can simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also displayed in the state where the positive variation state is set. The second special symbol may also be both fluctuating.

  In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 90 (a)), The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent condition can not be executed until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem occurs that the small hit game is not executed regardless of how long it is in the RUSH condition. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation state of the second special symbol (variation) The presence or absence, the remaining period of fluctuation) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is configured to be different.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 91, the second special symbol (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the definite change state) is satisfied when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied. The contents of the effect when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set, if the second special symbol is in the process of variation (see (c) in FIG. 88), the probability variation The "super challenge mode" is displayed in which the expectation for setting the RUSH state is higher than the "challenge mode" for indicating the state.

  When the "super challenge mode" is set, a comment indicating that the "super challenge mode" is displayed is displayed in the sub display area Ds. The character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 89B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 816.

  And in the small display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is in change is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, before the latent state is set, The "variation display mode" during fluctuation from the time point is displayed.

  Referring back to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. The display screen of the "super challenge mode" shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 variation executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation ends (see FIG. 88D), a “RUSH” rush screen is displayed to inform the player that the player has entered “RUSH” (see FIG. 91B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 91 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super challenge mode” will be described. FIG. 91 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via “super challenge mode”. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the main display area Dm, the display pattern 813 is displayed from the inside of the treasure box 817, and a display mode for notifying the player that the game has rushed to "RUSH" is displayed. Then, “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the gaming method in the rush game. At this point in time, a special display pattern Dm1 displays a variation display mode to indicate that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during jackpot fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display region Dm2 indicates a deviation. The display mode "435" is stopped and displayed.

  Referring back to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. During rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the latent state, a game in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by playing a right-handed game is frequently played a second special symbol lottery .

  Therefore, during the rush game, the player wins the small hit with a probability of 1/2, and it is possible to interrupt or discard the change of the first special symbol by the small hit game. However, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type, so when the short fluctuation pattern is selected, the jackpot fluctuation is discarded by the small hitting Can not do it. In this way, the player can prevent the player from winning an adverse jackpot in the rush game, and can execute the rush game while wondering whether he can win the most advantageous jackpot.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 93. FIG. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation / latency table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability variation / latency table 202ad2 performs the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability variation / latency table 202d (see FIG. 14A) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are defined, and for each jackpot type, the set contents of the time saving flag 203m and the probability variation flag 203g are defined.

  And, the jackpot B of the table 202ad2 for probability change / latency confirmation of the first embodiment and the jackpot C of the first embodiment are different in that the gaming state set after the jackpot game is different is different. Specifically, the jackpot B and the jackpot C are configured such that the time saving flag 203m is set to off and the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over. In the second embodiment, the time saving flag 203m is set to ON. That is, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won when the probability change state or the latent state is set, after the end of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends regardless of the jackpot type A definite change state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the contents of the positive variation 2 table 202ae2 will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 2 table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time reduction / probability change table 202ae2 has a variation pattern length corresponding to the special view 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability change table 202e2 (see FIG. 17A) of the first embodiment described above. Differ in that they are different. Other than that, it is the same as the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is “big hit A”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 159” as shown in FIG. A short variation with a variation time of 0.1 second is associated with it, and a middle variation with a variation time of 2 seconds is associated with the range of “160 to 196”, and the range of “197 to 198” varies A long fluctuation of 600 seconds is defined in association with the time.

  In the second embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability change state, the latent state is set as the gaming state, and the right-handed game is executed. And if you win the "big hit A" in the definite change state, the short change (0.1 seconds) is more likely to be selected as the change pattern, and even if you execute the special figure 2 game in a hurry, the first one is almost certainly I will be elected to the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot A is the jackpot which is most disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "big hit B", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 4", and the fluctuation time is 0.1 second Short fluctuation is specified in association with it, middle fluctuation of 2 seconds is correlated with the range of “5 to 41”, long fluctuation of 600 seconds is in the range of “42 to 198” Is specified.

  In the jackpot B, the middle fluctuation is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern. And, as described above, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (refer to FIG. 17 (b)) It has become a jackpot that is easy to discard.

  Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is “big hit C”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 1”, and the variation time is 0.1 seconds Short variation is defined in association, middle variation of 2 seconds is associated with the range of "2 to 5", long variation of 600 seconds corresponds to the range of "6 to 198" Is specified.

  As described above, when the jackpot C is won, a long variation of 600 seconds is easily executed as the variation pattern. During the long fluctuation of 600 seconds, it wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2 with a one second fluctuation of the second special symbol, so it is possible to reliably discard this jackpot, and the most easy to discard jackpot It is a type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the game of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the first embodiment described above, and when the jackpot variation is started in the drawing of the first special symbol when the gaming state is a definite change state, the point shifts to the 100% latent state, When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the definite variation / latent condition, it is different from the point that the 100% definite variation state is set after the termination of the big hit. About the flow of other games, since it is the same as that of a 1st embodiment, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control process executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the control process executed by main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above and We will focus on the differences between The present second embodiment is largely different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is possible to set the latent state from the probability change state as the gaming state at the start of the change of the first special symbol.

  Here, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231). This first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (S331) with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 of FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the game state update process (S332) is performed after the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is performed, and the other points are the same. The explanation is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above, but the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit In this case, the processing is different from that of performing the processing of setting the gaming state to the latent state, and the other parts are the same.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after the present lottery result is acquired in the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203n for the second special symbol is on (S451). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is on (S451: Yes), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set off (S409), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203n is not on in the process of S451 (S451: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit (S405). If it is determined that the jackpot is large (S405: Yes), the above-described processing of S406 to S408 is executed, and then the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF (S452), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, contents of the gaming state update process (S332) which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of the gaming state update process (S332). In this game state update process (S332), the game state is updated at the start of variation of the first special symbol, and a process of setting a command to be sent to the voice lamp control device is executed.

  In the gaming state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on (S651). When it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S651: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (S651: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S652). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S653), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process is ended.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S232). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S232) does not execute the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803) with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34), and the big hit of the special figure 2 Is different in that the process (S 809 to S 811) for discarding The other components are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551). The jackpot end process 2 (S2551) wins either the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C when the gaming state is the latent state with respect to the jackpot end process (S2512) of the first embodiment described above. Then, it differs in the point which the process which sets a probability change state is performed. The other components are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the jackpot end processing 2 (S2551), after executing the above-described processing of S2701 to S2704, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2751). If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is D (S2752). If the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot D (S 2752: Yes), the short time flag 203 m is set to OFF to set the gaming state to the latent state (S 2753), and the probability change flag 203 g is set to ON ( In step S2754, a command indicating a change in gaming state is set (S2709), and the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not D (S2752: No), the time saving flag 203m and the probability changing flag 203g are set on (S2706) to set the definite changing state to the gaming state (S2706). The processing of S2709 is executed, and this processing ends.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences. The control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is the variation stop process (S4214 in FIG. 65) with respect to the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the variation stop process 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead of the reference). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stop process 2 (S4251) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop process 2 (S4251), when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the latent state with respect to the fluctuation stop process (S4214) of the first embodiment, a display corresponding to the current lottery result The difference is that processing for setting a command (S4751) is added. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily convey to the player the lottery result of the forcibly stopped first special symbol. The other components are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the second embodiment described above, when the gaming state is a definite change state, and the big win is won by the change of the first special symbol during the positive change state, the time start of the change (at the start of the big hit change) By setting the flag 203m off, the latent state is set, and the small hit RUSH for executing the small hit game is set until the variation of the first special symbol is finished.

  Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won and the latent state is set, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. And by winning a small hit of the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop or discontinue the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, or until the jackpot of the second special symbol is won. Alternatively, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol can not be discarded, and the latent state is set until the variation is stopped.

  In addition to such a configuration, when the definite variation end condition and the latent confirmation end condition (for example, the number of changes in the special figure 1, the number of changes in the special figure 2, the number of small hits, etc.) are set, It may be configured to end the latent state and shift to the normal state. In addition, the end condition (for example, the remaining number of changes until the latent confirmation end condition) is informed to the player, the player judges the game situation, and special figure 1 game to special figure 1 game (left strike) It may be configured to switch to the game). By configuring in this manner, various game characteristics can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of gaming state set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

  In the first embodiment described above, the small special winning character is configured to be won only in the second special symbol lottery, and the special small symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating the small small winning when it is elected as a specific small hitting (small hitting A). In the case of stop display), the first special symbol in fluctuation is forcibly stopped in the display mode indicating disengaging, and when the other small hit (small hit B) is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in fluctuation It was configured to interrupt the subtraction of time.

  Then, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed more easily, and the player is made to hit the small hit frequently during the latent state, whereby It was configured to be able to give a prize ball. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the jackpot is won by the second special symbol lottery, and it is configured to be easily shifted to the latent state after the jackpot game is executed, and the number of times the latent state is set An upper limit is set for the number of wins, and when the upper limit is reached, the normal state is set regardless of the type of jackpot that has won.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a small winning is won in any of the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing, and when one small special symbol is won (a special When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit), the variation of the other special symbol in execution is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the removal It is composed of

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to forcibly remove the other special symbol variation even by drawing any special symbol. Further, since the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the small jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot game can be prevented from being executed even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a specific gaming state (for example, a latent state) is set, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed together. When a specific gaming state is set, the control for forcibly stopping one big hit variation by the other small hit is configured to be executed mutually. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from ending by the jackpot winning, and to continue the latent state over a long period of time.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables are referred to when setting fluctuation patterns of each special symbol, and fluctuation patterns defined in each fluctuation pattern table are made different. . Specifically, the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning a jackpot is different from the length of the variation pattern (variation time) set when winning a small prize.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the probability that the jackpot game is actually executed even if the probability that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery or the probability that the small jackpot is won is the same. it can. For example, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily set is referred to as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, a jackpot fluctuation of 10 minutes occurs as one of the special symbol fluctuations. When executed, it is possible to execute many other special symbol lottery while the special symbol changes. And since the big hit fluctuation of one of the special symbols is forcibly stopped by winning the small hit in the other special symbol lottery, it becomes difficult to play the big hit game of the special symbol. Also, similarly, when a variation pattern table is easily referred to which a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is easily set as a variation pattern set as a jackpot variation of a special symbol, it is executed during the special symbol variation. Since the other special symbol lottery number decreases, the jackpot game of the special symbol becomes easy to be played.

  Also, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small hit variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) in the same manner as the variation pattern set as the big hit variation described above The jackpot game can be facilitated to be performed by setting a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the small hitting fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, becomes. Once the latent state is set, the latent state does not end unless the jackpot game of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to play a game in a latent state for a long period of time by suppressing a small hit being won in each special symbol lottery and a big hit game being executed.

  In this way, using the game characteristic of continuing the latent state advantageous to the player by forcibly stopping (disengaging) the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol by the small hit of the other special symbol. Since it is possible to play the game (playing a lottery for a special symbol which is not during the jackpot fluctuation), even in the jackpot fluctuation, the operation of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the display mode for indicating that the small winning is won is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special falling forcibly stopped by the small hitting It is possible to execute a suggestion display capable of suggesting the player the actual lottery result of the symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation.

  Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, it sets the variation pattern command for display to be sent to the display control device 114. A variation information storage means for temporarily storing variation information (special lottery result, variation time, etc.) included in the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is provided, and then the special symbol in variation is forced. In the case of receiving a command (small hit variation stop command) for forcibly pulling out and stopping a special symbol in change based on a small hit among the commands (variable stop command) for stopping out separately To the display control device 114, together with a display command for causing the special symbol in change to be forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating detachment. Setting the display command to suggest a stop variation information based on the change information stored in the fluctuation information storage unit.

  Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command for suggesting the stop variation information, for example, the effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, the character of the monster is displayed if the lottery result is a big hit, and the symbol of the treasure box is displayed if it is a small hit. Further, the color of the monster character is displayed so as to be varied according to the jackpot type. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player recognize how many times it has been possible to avoid by making the end of the game state of latent probability change small hit.

  In the present embodiment, also at the timing of displaying the display mode ("V symbol") indicating a small hit, in order to suggest the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time However, the timing at which the small hit game is started, the timing at which the small hit game is started, the small hit game, or the small hit game is ended. It may be configured to be performed at timing. In addition, it may be possible to execute a combined display combining the suggestion display and the display for showing the small hit winnings, or gaming information for showing the small hitting game result (for example, the number of winning balls and the latent state) The number of small hitting games executed during) and the indication may be fused.

  In addition, the above-described suggestion display may be set to be easier to be executed when the special symbol forcibly stopped this time is won by the jackpot than when the jackpot is not won by the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to think that he has won a small hit at a good timing even if the special symbol forced to stop this time has not been won for a big hit.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player wins a small hit, there are cases in which a special symbol in motion is forcibly stopped and a case in which it is temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the small hit of this time forcedly stopped the special symbol variation being executed or the temporary stop. It is good to set the display mode of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, only the first ball entrance 64b1 is disposed below the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first embodiment, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is the right. The first entrance 64b2 and the second entrance 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side, the first variable winning device 65 and the first variable winning device 65 are opened to the open state at the time of a big hit game. A second variable winning device 650 which is in an open state during a hit game is disposed.

  Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, there is formed a sorting flow path capable of sorting and guiding the game balls to the first right ball entry port 64b2 and the second ball entry port 640. In the upper part of the sorting channel, shoot with a right strike (a game method in which the player shoots the game ball with a firing strength that allows the game ball to shoot down the right side of the third symbol display device 81) A rotary distribution member 700 capable of alternately distributing the played balls alternately to the first channel 701 and the second channel 702 is disposed.

  A first receiving portion and a second receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball are formed in the rotary distribution member 700, and the first rotary receiving member and the second reception portion are rotated when the rotary distribution member 700 is rotated. The parts are alternately arranged to face obliquely upward to the left. The rotary distribution member 700 is configured to rotate about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and the game is hit in the state where the first receiving part is directed obliquely upward to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101). When the ball enters the first receiving portion, the rotary distribution member 700 is rotated by 90 degrees in the left direction by the weight of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball is distributed (guided) to the first flow path 701. When the game balls are distributed to the first flow path 7901 by the rotary distribution member 700, the rotary distribution member 700 is stopped with the second receiving portion directed obliquely upward to the left. Next, the right-handed game ball enters the second receiving unit, and the weight of the game ball that has entered the ball causes the rotary distribution member 700 to rotate in the right direction, and the second flow path The game balls in the second receiving unit are distributed (guided) to 702.

  In this manner, the balls emitted by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first channel 701 and the second channel 702 by the rotary distribution member 700. The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 pass through the bending path 701a, pass through the through gate 67 and the second inlet port 640, and flow out to the lower right region. In addition, the balls distributed to the second flow channel 702 flow down the third flow channel 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flow into the inflow port 704a, and the back surface side of the first flow channel 701 (see FIG. It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side in the viewpoint, and flows out from the outlet 704c to the lower right side area on the game board 13.

  The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 merge in the lower right area, and the second variable winning device 650, the first variable winning device 65 It flows upward and flows into the out port 66.

  Since the rotary distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, the first flow is generated when 100 balls are fired per minute. 50 channels are distributed to the path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and 50 in the second flow channel 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is formed of a ball passage formed by a passage width (about 15 mm) for one ball, and the flow-down speed of the ball is reduced by a bending path 701a provided in the middle thereof The sphere passage time until the sphere which has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

  In the third embodiment, the through gate 67 is disposed in the first channel 701, and the second ball inlet 640 is disposed in the second channel 702. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second ball entrance 640.

  In the game board 13, the movable member 1500 is always provided along the ball rolling surface of the most upstream part of the first flow passage 701, and the movable member 1500 is always moved to the open position (open In the case of the state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

  Here, the operation of the movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be varied between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive processing (not shown) executed every four milliseconds in the main processing of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 second and then repeatedly closed for 1.2 seconds.

  That is, in the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 101) of the third embodiment, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the movable member 1500 is always disposed. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the provided rolling surface. The ball flows into the first flow path 701, and the timing when it rolls on the movable member 1500 at all times (or always falls on the movable member) coincides with the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always opened. The ball passes through the open movable member 1500 and enters the right first ball inlet 64b.

  The timing at which the movable member 1500 constantly rolls (or falls constantly on the movable member) is at an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always in the open state is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is one second, the timing at which the two coincide is once in about 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, approximately four balls enter the first right ball entrance 64b in one minute.

  That is, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a big hit game or during a short time game, the ball enters the right first ball inlet 64b regularly, so the big hit game is It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where there is no hold of the special figure 1 when it has ended and shifted to the short time state. In addition, since a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to hit the target is set as the period in which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time, the first left ball entry is made in the normal state. The right hitting game can be more disadvantageous to the player than the left hitting game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  Specifically, if the gaming state is the normal state, when the left hitting game is performed, about 15 shots enter the first left ball entry port 64a out of 250 fired balls. It is designed, and five balls will be paid out when the ball enters. In addition, it is designed that approximately 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when firing 250 balls, it is possible to cause approximately 20 balls to enter the first left ball entrance 64a, considering that the winning balls to be paid out are also fired again. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the right-handed game is played, about nine shots are designed to enter the first right ball entrance 64b out of 250 balls fired. If you hit the ball, two balls will be paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area | region. Therefore, in the right-hand game, even if it is considered that the winning balls to be paid out will be fired again when firing 250 balls, approximately 10 balls should be allowed to enter the first right ball entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball fired in the right-hand game passes, but in the normal state, the right-hand game is more than the left-hand game The general ball entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept that the player is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as the winning balls in the right-handed game during the time saving state or the big hit state.

  Next, among the components arranged in the right area of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second ball inlet 640 will be described focusing on the difference from the structure of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. Do.

  The through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first channel 701 having the bending path 701a, and the second ball inlet 640 is disposed downstream of the second channel 702 (lower end of the fifth channel 704b). doing. With this configuration, the spheres flowing into the second flow path 702 can be made to flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without decreasing the flow-down speed of the balls. Therefore, since the flow-down interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 simultaneously. Can be suppressed. In addition, when it is notified that the electric symbol 640a is open by the third symbol display device 81 without noticing that the electric symbol 640a has been opened, the ball can be quickly taken to the second ball entry port 640. You can enter the ball.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701,) through which the distributing member 700 can distribute the through gate 67 serving as a trigger for executing the lottery of the normal symbol and the electric role product 640a whose operation is controlled by winning of the normal symbol. Since it arranges in the 2nd flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that a ball may be made to flow down only to either flow path (when the distribution function is invalidated), the second ball entrance It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the motorized accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down in only one flow path is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but using the configuration of this modification allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 illegally. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

  The case where the ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period in which the ball flows down is shorter than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right side area in 1 minute, the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the sphere are fired next, and the second flow path 702 Flowing down the lower right area (the area in which the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are disposed) of the game board 13 at approximately the same time (about 0.1 second difference) as the ball flowing into the Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily make a plurality of balls win at one time.

  In addition, a part of the second flow channel 702 (fifth flow channel 704 b) is provided on the back side of the first flow channel 701, and a plurality of flow channels overlap in a front view. Thus, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space (the area where the game flow path occupies the game board 13) that forms the ball flow path. it can.

  Furthermore, the ball outlet of the second flow passage 702 is positioned lower than the outlet (downstream side of the second ball inlet 640) of the first flow passage 701, and the first in the lower right region of the game board 13 The ball is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the ball flowing out of the flow path 701. As a result, the ball vigorously discharged from the outlet 704 c (the ball discharged at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first channel 701) directly collides with the ball flowing out of the first channel 701, which is irregular. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball flow.

  In the present embodiment, although the configuration in which the balls emitted by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the rotary distribution member 700 is used, other configurations may be used, for example, 2 Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the two flow paths, balls may be distributed at different rates, or may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the distributing member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing sphere is changed by the weight of the passing sphere, but, for example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A dividing member may be used.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110. FIG. Note that only differences from the first embodiment will be illustrated and described, and the illustration and description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 102 is a schematic view showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, the migration destination selection table 202ba is added to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the small hitting random number table 202b is a small hitting random number 3 table 202bb, The second random number table 202c is changed to the second random number 3 table 202bc, the map variation pattern table 202f is changed to the map variation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small hit type selection table 202g is changed to the small hit type selection 3 table 202bg This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the small hitting random number 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, the player wins a small hit also in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the acquired value of the first random number counter is in the range of "112 to 116", it is configured to be a small hit.

  Next, the second random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). According to the third embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, even when the low probability of the normal symbol (the normal state, the latent state), it is configured to win the winning of the substantially normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 230", it is configured to be a hit of a normal symbol.

  Next, the small hitting type selection 3 table 202bg will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). In the third embodiment, as described above, it is configured to win a small hit also in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, if the value of the small hit type counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", "small hit B" is set. Be done. In addition, about the content of the small hitting classification selected when winning a small hitting by lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2), since it is the same as that of a 1st embodiment mentioned above, the detailed explanation is omitted. Do.

  And when it wins in the small hit, as in the case of winning in the small hit with the second special symbol, depending on the small hit type, the change of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcedly stopped by disengaging It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the player wins "small hit A", it temporarily stops the second special symbol that is changing, and when it is "small hit B", it deviates from the change of the second special symbol. It is configured to stop forcibly. In the third embodiment, the same small hitting type (small hitting A, small hitting B, even when the small winning in the drawing of the special figure 1 and the small winning in the drawing of the special drawing 2) Is configured to select at the same rate (each 50%), but the selection rate of each small hit type may be set appropriately, for example, the probability of winning small If the winning is won, the small hitting B may be selected at a higher rate than the case where the small hitting is selected in the special drawing 2 lottery in which the probability of winning the small hitting is high. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to increase the frequency of discarding the jackpot fluctuation of the special view 2 based on the small hit winning of the special view 1. Furthermore, when winning in a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, only the small hit B may be configured to be set, or it is set in the small hit winning time or the stop display of the small hit symbol The ratio of the small hitting type selected according to the gaming state may be variable.

  Next, the common drawing fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation time is shortened also at the low probability of the normal symbol. Specifically, the variation time is configured to be 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) at the low probability of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to change, and the chance to draw normal symbols increases. Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, it is configured to be easy to win the hit of the normal symbol even when the low probability of the normal symbol. Thereby, even in the latent state, the ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

  Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. The transition destination selection table 202ba is a type of fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern to be determined after a small hitting game when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won, and the number of times of transition thereof It is a lottery table for determining the number of times (the number of times of execution of the determination game (lottery of special symbols) of selecting a variation pattern from the transition pattern selection table which has been shifted).

  FIG. 105 schematically shows the contents of the transfer destination selection table 202ba. A migration 1 table 202ba (see FIG. 107) and a migration 2 table 202ba 2 (see FIG. 108) are set in the migration destination table 202ba, and the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba 202ba2 is configured to be set.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the contents of the transfer destination selection table 202ba in detail. The current gaming state is divided into the case where the gaming state is the latent state (non-power support gaming state in the high probability gaming state) and the gaming state other than the latent state (others). If the game state is a game state other than the latent game state, the transition destination table is not set, and the change pattern is set from the change pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) set to the current state. ing.

  On the other hand, in the case of the latent game state, the transition destination table and the number of times of variation of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern from the transition destination table based on the value of the acquired transition counter 203ba (prescribed number after transition) Is set respectively. Specifically, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "0 to 90", the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected), and 10 times is set (selected) as the specified number after migration. . Further, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is “91 to 98”, the migration 1 table ba1 is set, and 3 times is set as the specified number after migration. When the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba is "99", the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, and 100 times is set as the specified number after migration.

  As described above, only when the game is in the latent game state, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is configured to be set as the variation pattern selection table 202e to be used after the small hit game when the small hit is won. There is. By configuring in this manner, the right-handed game (rather than the game method in which the player shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity at which the game ball flows down the left channel of the third symbol display device 81) The variation pattern can be configured to be determined using the specific variation pattern selection table for the specified number of times when the small hitting game is to be made only in the latent condition gaming state in which the game is played in the game.

  Here, in the normal gaming state (playing state without low probability power support) and the probability change gaming state (playing state with high probability power support), 10 minutes is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. Because the winning rate to the first right ball entrance 64b2 is configured to be lower than when hit to the left, it is possible for the player to hit left and play the game to the first left ball entrance 64b1. It is configured such that playing a game by entering a ball becomes an advantageous game method for the player. In this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the setting of the judgment value of the second random number table 202c is changed, and "0 to 230" is used as the judgment value of the random symbol per random symbol table for low probability. Is set, and "0 to 231" is set as the random number per random symbol table for high probability time, and the difference between the low probability time and the high probability time is reduced. Further, the set values of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202f are also changed, and the common drawing low certainty and the common drawing high certainty are set to 500 ms. By configuring in this way, even in the gaming state with power support (high probability gaming state in the common view), even in the non-power support gaming state (low probability gaming state in the common drawing), electric The special effects are set to be easily released, and the gaming ball is more easily entered into the second entrance 640 than the first left entrance 64b 1.

  However, in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, since the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be significantly long, the game ball hit to the right can be configured to be disadvantageous to the player. , Can play a game by left-handed game. Further, in the latent game state, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting the right (refer to FIG. 17B). ). On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG. 17 (b), and the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, when in the latent game state, right-handed game is possible (variation time can be set short), and a lottery with the second special symbol is made, and it becomes easy to win a small hit. In the small hit game, since the open game of the 2R second variable winning device 650 is performed, it becomes possible to win the game ball to the second variable winning device 650, and the player is paid out a winning ball for the winning Thus, the player's balls can be increased. Therefore, the smaller the winning chance (the number of winnings) can be increased as the period of the latent gaming state is set longer.

  Here, when winning the jackpot A in the first special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot is configured to be set to the probability variation gaming state (the gaming state with high probability, power support), so in the left-handed gaming state It is configured to be set, and a gaming state (a gaming state in which a small hit game is hard to be executed) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent probability gaming state is set.

  However, in the third embodiment, in the case of the small hitting B, the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the fluctuation is forcibly removed based on the stop of the special symbol showing the small hitting as the lottery result is forcibly removed. It is configured to stop. Therefore, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on (corresponding to) the lottery result to be the jackpot A is executed, the second special symbol is small before the fluctuation time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the fluctuation of the lottery result of hitting B, the fluctuation of becoming the jackpot A in the first special symbol during fluctuation can be forced out of the lottery result and can be stopped and displayed, from the latent gaming state The transition to the probability variation gaming state can be prevented, and the period of the latent gaming state can be extended.

  Therefore, in the latent state, the variation time for the second special symbol to be small hit (may only be the small hit B) is shorter than the variation time for the first special symbol to be big hit (it may be only the big hit A). By making it easy to be selected, it is possible to make the gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Therefore, although the details will be described later, when the transition 2 table 202ba2 (refer to FIG. 108) is determined, the fluctuation time in which the success or failure judgment result in the first special symbol becomes a big hit is a fluctuation of 60s with a probability of 99% selectivity. The time is determined, and the variation time for which the success or failure judgment result is a small hit in the second special symbol is determined the variation time of 1 s with a probability of 95% selectivity. In addition, in the second special symbol, when the result of the determination of the success or failure is out, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Therefore, after the first special symbol starts a big hit variation, 120 out-of-out variations become possible, and the probability of becoming a small hit in the second special symbol is set at 231/459 (see FIG. 103 (a)). Because it is done, it wins the small hitting B with high probability (the probability that the small hitting B is selected is 1/2 in the small hitting win), the second special symbol is stopped, the jackpot A is won The fluctuation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a deviation. Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the specified number of times for transition 2 table 202ba2 is set 100 times, so that the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 times for transition 2 table 202ba2 It is fixed and set (the condition that the latent probability gaming state is set is set (a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the gaming status of the transition destination when the latent probability gaming state shifts to another gaming state) 1) is set). Even if the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is selected for a small hit in a set period (within the specified number of times), the transfer destination table is not changed, and the same number is maintained until the specified number of times elapses. The migration destination table is maintained and set.

  In this manner, the setting period of the latent game state is extended by setting the transition 2 table 202ba2, and during that time, it is possible to win a small hit, and the small hit number is increased to be awarded to the player. The number of prize balls can be increased.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which can hit small in both a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol, it is small with only a 2nd special symbol like 1st Embodiment, without restricting to it It may be configured to hit. In addition, small hit B only was configured to be forced to stop the variation of the first special symbol by the lottery result out of the first special symbol, but it is not limited thereto, the first special symbol (with the first special symbol in all small hits In the case of a small hit, the second special symbol may be configured to be forcibly removed and stopped.

  Next, the transition 1 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the transition 1 table 202ba1. The transition 1 table 202ba1 is transition information storage because the transition 1 table 202ba1 is determined as the transition destination table when the small win is won by the transition destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106). It is a table set in the area 203bc.

  In the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and 60s with a selection probability of 5%. The variation time of is determined to be determined. Further, when the lottery result is a small winning, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, when the lottery result is out, the variation time of 1 s is determined with the selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with the selection probability of 95%, and the fluctuation time of 600s is determined with the selection probability of 5%. It is configured to be. In addition, when the lottery result is a small winning, it is configured that the fluctuation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. When the lottery result is out, the variation time of 1 s is determined with the selection probability of 100%.

  Thus, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a short variation time of 0.5s is determined with a high selection probability, and the second special symbol is a small hit, Since the variation time of 1 s or 0.5 s is selected, it is configured that it becomes difficult to start the variation of the first special symbol and forcibly stop after the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the jackpot A is won with the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the change, so it is difficult for the player to shift the transition destination table ( It is configured as a fluctuation pattern selection table). Therefore, the transition destination selection table 202ba sets the number of times that the specified number of times after the transition of the transition 1 table 202ba1 is large (10 times in the present embodiment) to the setting disadvantageous to the player. Further, the transition 1 table 202ba1 has the probability of being selected set to 99/100 in the transition destination selection table 202ba, and in the latent game state, the latent game state is set to be long, and the euphoria becomes too high. It is configured to be able to suppress problems.

  Next, the transition 2 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the transition 2 table 202ba2. The migration 2 table 202ba2 is set in the migration information storage area 203bc when the migration 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

  In transition 2 table 202ba2, when the success or failure judgment result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 60s is determined with a selection probability of 99% It is configured to be. In addition, when the success / failure determination result is a small winning, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, in the case where the result of the determination of the success or failure is out, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, when the success or failure judgment result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and the fluctuation time of 600 s with a selection probability of 99% It is configured to be determined. In addition, when the success / failure determination result is a small winning, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. Further, in the case where the result of the determination of the success or failure is out, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with the selection probability of 100%.

  In this manner, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, as the fluctuation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation time (60s) is determined with high probability, and the lottery result of the second special symbol The fluctuation time selected when is a small hit is configured such that a short fluctuation time (1 s) is selected with high probability. Therefore, even if the variation of small hitting B is started in the second special symbol after the variation which becomes the big hit in the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol does not stop the variation before the first symbol stops. (2) The variation of the special symbol is easy to stop, and it is possible to forcibly stop the first special symbol during variation by the judgment result of the removal. Therefore, the jackpot A can be easily prevented from being executed, and the period in which the latent probability change is maintained and set can be extended to increase the number of times the small hit game is executed and to increase the number of prize balls for the player.

  In addition, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the fluctuation time is set short as 0.5 s, so the fluctuation time (60 s) that becomes the big hit of the first special symbol Even after the is executed, it is possible to make the fluctuation 120 times until the fluctuation stops, and since the lottery probability of the small hitting is 231/459, the first special symbol stops fluctuating a plurality of times with a high probability You can win a small hit in the meantime. Among small wins, since the selection ratio of small B is 1/2, the fluctuation of the small B can be easily stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops, and the execution of the large A is blocked. Easy to configure.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, the special table will be described. In the special table, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table ba2 is set, and a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern in the latent probability state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the specified number of times has elapsed. It is a kind of selection table.

  FIG. 109 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special table. In this special table, when the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set and the specified number of times elapses, the change information storage area 203bc is selected at the timing when the next change pattern is selected after the change of the specified number of times ends. It is set.

  In the special table, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5s is determined with a 20% selection probability, and the variation time of 60s is determined with an 80% selection probability Is configured. In addition, when the success / failure determination result is a small winning, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, in the case where the result of the determination of the success or failure is out, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, if the success or failure of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation time of 0.5s is determined with a 20% selection probability, and the variation time of 600s is determined with an 80% selection probability. It is configured. Moreover, when the success / failure determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation time of 1s is determined with a 50% selection probability, and the variation time of 30s is determined with a 50% selection probability. It is done. Moreover, when the success / failure determination result of a 2nd special symbol is remove | excluded, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation time of 0.5s may be determined with 100% of selection probability.

  Thus, in the special table, the selection probability is set such that the fluctuation time of 60 s (seconds) is determined higher when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win than the transition 1 table 202ba1 while the second The selection rate at which the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined as the fluctuation time of the small hit in the special symbol is set low. Moreover, the fluctuation time at the time of removal in the second special symbol is set to 0.5 s, and is set to be shorter than the transition 1 table 202ba1. That is, in the special table, it is easy to forcibly stop by shifting out the fluctuation of 60s, which is the big hit A in the first special symbol, than the transition 1 table 202ba 2, by stopping the variation which is the small hit B of the second special symbol. It is composed of a table that is advantageous to the player, and setting the special table corresponds to setting a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the special table, a long fluctuation time of 30s is determined with a selection probability of 1/2 with a small hitting fluctuation time, so that a fluctuation (variation time 60s) that becomes jackpot A in the first special symbol is started From at least one small hit variation is configured to be feasible. As a result, the special table is configured not to be a more advantageous table than the transition 2 table 202ba2.

  In this way, the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set, and when the specified number of times elapses, the special table to be in the state of advantageous gaming is set until the transition destination table is determined by lottery next small hit Is configured. In this way, the jackpot A is executed between the specified number of times and the transition to the transition destination table, and the termination of the latent game state is suppressed. Furthermore, the transition 2 table 202ba2 that is most advantageous to the player is set, and even after the specified number of times has passed, a special table that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set. The player's desire to play can be maintained, and interest can be given to the type of the transition destination table to be set next.

  Usually, in the gaming machine, the interest of the player is the highest for winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, but according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state or the odd change gaming state, the jackpot game is made interesting In the latent game state, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot game in the first special symbol will not be executed, and different expectations can be held depending on the game state, making the game more diverse. Can be

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a schematic view showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment in that a migration counter 203ba, a post-transition variation number counter 203bb, and a migration information storage area 203bc are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The migration counter 203 ba is a counter for determining the migration destination table and the prescribed number of times after migration (prescribed number of times) from the migration destination selection table 202 ba. The transition counter 203 ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and is a counter value that is updated in the process of S 2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. is there. When the power is turned on, updating is performed based on the value backed up when the power was turned off, the RAM clear is executed, and when the backup area is initialized, the updating is started from "0" which is the initial value. The transition counter 203 ba is configured to be acquired based on winning in the small hit in the process of S1172 in the special view 2 deviation fluctuation process 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. ing. In addition, about special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing 3, processing of the 2nd special symbol in processing of special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (figure 112: S1071 reference) to the 1st special symbol, processing of the 1st special symbol is the 1st special symbol (2) Since it only replaces each special symbol, its illustration and explanation are omitted.

  The post-transition variation number counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol executed (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) executed after the transition destination table is set. . The post-transition variation number counter 203bb is an initial value when the transition destination table is set in the process of S1175 in the special figure 2 deviation variation process 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A certain "0" is set. In addition, after being added one by one in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (see FIG. 112: S1071), the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba. If it is determined that the number of times is the specified number, the special table is set in the migration information storage area 203bc.

  In the special figure 1 out-of-variation process 3 (not shown), as with the special figure 2 out-of-variation process 3, the process is executed on the post-transition variation number counter 203bb.

  The migration information storage area 203 bc is a storage area in which the migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202 ba and the special table set when the specified number of times of the migration destination table has been set have been set. When information on the transfer destination table is stored in this area, control is performed so that the change pattern is determined from the transfer destination table of the stored type as the change pattern selection table of the special symbol.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Third Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 112. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 31: S306) is the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (not shown), as opposed to the control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37: S908) is the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), and the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (FIG. 38: S1009) is the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation The difference is that the process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) is changed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special symbol. The only difference is that the symbol is changed, so detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 111, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, data of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1001). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability change gaming state or the latent probability change gaming state is set. If it is determined that the probability change flag 203 is on, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S1003). Thereafter, the process of S1005 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1002 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (S1002: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 and S1004 is a big hit (S1005). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1005: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set as a jackpot (S1007).

  Based on the acquired value of the first hit classification counter C2, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is reset to “0” (S1071). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S1005: No), the special figure 2 out-of-variation fluctuation process is executed (S1009). After the special figure 2 out-of-variation process (S1009) is executed, this process ends. In addition, about the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1009), although details are explained with reference to FIG. 112, the process necessary for the start of change of the special symbol when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out is To be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) which is one process in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment. The process will be described. In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S1101). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1103). A symbol corresponding to the small hitting symbol is set for the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104). It is determined whether the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is set (S1171). If it is determined that the migration destination table or the special table is set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1171 that either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is not set (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, the migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set migration destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-migration variation counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this processing ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S1101: No), the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is incremented by 1 (S1176). Then, in the process of S1176, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-transition variation number counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). If the value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter 203bb is a prescribed number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a transition command is set (S1179), and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed 2 Set the out-of-order symbol of the special symbol (S1105) and end this processing.

  If it is determined in the process of S1177 that the value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter 203bb is not a prescribed number (S1177: No), the process of S1178 to S1179 described above is skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The outlying symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1105), and this processing is ended.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment described above will be described. Transition to a low probability state when the number of times the special symbol (the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) changes the predetermined probability (for example, 100 times) the high probability gaming state in the latent probability change and the positive change gaming state It may be configured to By configuring in this manner, even when the transition destination table for forcibly stopping the execution of the jackpot A by force and stopping is continuously determined, the gaming state can be varied, and the euphoria becomes extremely high. Problems can be suppressed.

  Further, as a further modification 2 of the third embodiment, in the latent probability variation gaming state, the transition destination table to be selected is set to be variable according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, for example, 200 times or more (first 1 special symbol, the total value of the number of changes in the second special symbol) If it fluctuates, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is lengthened (for example, 300s), and the small hitting fluctuation of the second special symbol is short (for example, Set for 0.5s. The transition period of the second special symbol may also be shortened to 0.5 s to set a transition destination table that is more advantageous for the player. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enhance the motivation to stop the jackpot A forcibly by the small hit of the second special symbol in the latent probability change and to enhance the interest of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113 to FIG. The fourth embodiment is a condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state with respect to the above-described second embodiment (special image high probability end) The condition is that the number of times of variation of the special symbol is added as a condition, a common drawing high certainty end condition, and that a new effect is added based on the above-described end condition.

  In the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the definite variation state, the latent state is set at the start of the fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation) for showing the jackpot winning, and the latent state is the jackpot The game is configured to continue until the game is started (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit). Furthermore, during the big hit of the special figure 1, when the small hit of the special figure 2 is won, when the small hitting game is executed (the special figure 2 is the stop indication (decision indication) with the indication mode which shows the small hitting) In this case, the lottery result (big hit) of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and it is configured to be forcibly stopped at the special figure 1 off.

  By configuring in this way, since the jackpot game due to the jackpot fluctuation in which the latent state is set is not executed, it is possible to vary the predetermined latency state period (jackpot fluctuation period of the special figure 1). In some cases, it is possible to provide the player with a long-term latency status and to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the probability change state, the latent state is set at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. As a condition for ending the latent state, a special figure fluctuation end condition which is satisfied when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is newly added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state is continuously set by discarding the jackpot win of the special figure 1, and the termination condition of the latent state while discarding the jackpot win Can provide the player with a sense of crisis that

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit end to the low probability state is set as the special figure fluctuation end condition. That is, for example, when the special figure fluctuation is set 50 times as the special figure fluctuation end condition, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the special figure fluctuation 10th in the definite change state, the remaining 40 special figures are maximum. It becomes possible to execute the game while the fluctuation is in the latent state. On the other hand, in the case of winning the special figure 1 jackpot at the 40th special figure change in the definite change state, it is configured such that only 10 special figure changes can be executed as a game in the latent state at the maximum. In this way, when the positive change state is set after the big hit ends, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the latent state sooner, so that the player can pay attention to the game during the positive change state. it can.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect mode of the notification effect for indicating that the small hit has been won by the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state is variably set based on the remaining period of the latent state period. It is composed of That is, in the present embodiment, since the latent state is ended without winning in the big win (the special map change end condition is satisfied), for example, in the state where the remaining period of the latent state is small, If the special figure 1 jackpot is destroyed based on the special figure 2 small hit, it is highly likely that the latency will end while the big hit is destroyed, so the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded, It may be a disadvantage for the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the latent state is a predetermined period or more (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) as an effect aspect of the notification effect for indicating that the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery is won during the latent state. Is 30 times or more), an advantageous rendering mode is suggested to indicate that discarding the special figure 1 jackpot this time can be an advantageous game for the player, and the remaining period of the latent state is less than the predetermined period In this case, it is configured to set an adverse rendering mode that suggests that discarding the special figure 1 jackpot at this time may be a disadvantaged game for the player. In this way, it is possible to suggest a future game development to the player, so it is possible to play an easy-to-understand game.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the small hit type for discarding the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is not discarded according to the special figure 2 small hit type, and is not discarded. A small hit type is provided, and the above-described notification effect is executed regardless of the type of the small hit that has been won. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the special figure 1 fluctuation has been discarded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, the flow of the game in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing a flow which is advantageous for the player in the flow of the game in which the latent change state is set after the positive change state is set after the big hit, and FIG. 114 is the positive change state after the big hit It is a timing chart showing a flow which is advantageous to the player in the flow of the game in which the latent state is set after the setting of. In addition, about the flow in which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the flow when shifting from the probability change state to the latent state, and the display mode of the effect display performed at that timing, the second embodiment described above As it is identical to the embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113, a flow that is advantageous for the player in the flow of the game in which the latent change state is set after the probability change state is set after the big hit ends. As shown in FIG. 113, when fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is started in the state where the definite change state (50 times) is set after the end of the big hit game, the special figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed at the timing The remaining definite number of variations is displayed by subtraction.

  Then, similarly to the second embodiment described above, if the jackpot is won in the third special figure 1 lottery after the probability change state is set, the special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation) corresponding to the jackpot is won The game state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state at the timing when the is started. At this time, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, the super challenge mode is displayed in the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation ends (see FIG. 113 (b)) (FIG. 91 (a) reference). Then, when the special figure 2 variation in the latent state becomes executable, the RUSH mode in which the small hitting game is frequently executed is displayed (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  In the state where the gaming state has shifted to the latent state by executing the special figure 1 jackpot variation, a game in which the special figure 2 lottery is repeatedly executed is performed by the right-handed game, and among them, the special figure 2 When the small hit (small hit B) is won, a small hit notification effect based on the remaining number of certainty changes at the time when the small hit B is won is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 113, since the player wins the small hit B when the remaining certainty change number is “44”, it is possible to easily aim for the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period. A "chance display" (FIG. 113 (d)) is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a)) indicating that the player has won the small hit B at a timing advantageous to the player. Then, after the small hitting game is finished, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are newly started, and the RUSH mode indicating that it is in the latent state is displayed (FIG. 113 (e )). After that, when the remaining certainty change number is "30", the jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery, and the jackpot game is executed.

  As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 113, immediately after the definite change state is set (in the third special drawing 1 lottery after the positive change state setting), it wins the special view 1 jackpot and the latent state is It is set, and it is elected as special figure 2 small hitting (small hitting B) at an early stage in the latent state (in the second special drawing 2 lottery after the latent state is set), special figure 1 It is possible to execute a long-term latent state game, regardless of the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation. Furthermore, since the player wins the special figure 2 jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 jackpot which is discarded during the latent state, it becomes the flow of the most advantageous game for the player.

  On the other hand, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, many special figure fluctuations are executed until a special figure 1 jackpot is won after the definite change state is set, and the latent certain state is set And the number of remaining definite changes is "7". Since the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) is won during the latent state, the special figure 1 jackpot variation is discarded. That is, since the timing at which the special figure 1 jackpot variation is discarded has a remaining probability variation number of "5", it is difficult to aim for a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the remaining latent period, “Pinch display” ((c) in FIG. 114) indicating that the player has won the small hit B at a timing disadvantageous to the player is displayed (see (b) in FIG. 115).

  Furthermore, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 114, in the seven latent game states executed after the special figure 1 jackpot variation is discarded, the jackpot is not won because the special figure 2 lottery has won the jackpot. Without winning, the latent state ends and the flow shifts to the normal state. Thus, in the present embodiment, depending on the timing of discarding the special figure 1 jackpot variation being executed during the latent state, it is advantageous for the player to discard the special figure 1 jackpot as shown in FIG. 113. It becomes possible to set the case where it becomes easy, and as shown in FIG. 114, the case where it is easy for the player to be disadvantageous if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game by giving a sense of tension at all times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined transition condition (special figure 1 big hit) is satisfied in a state in which the probability change state is set, it is configured to shift to the latent state which is advantageous to the player. The maximum period in which the latent state is set is variable according to the length of the period until the transition condition is satisfied. That is, as shown in FIG. 114, even if the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded immediately after the latent state is set, the remaining latency period may be short. Therefore, after the definite change state is set, the transition condition to the latent state is quickly established, and further, after the latent state is set, a special game is performed in which the special figure 1 jackpot is quickly discarded. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, based on the length of the remaining latent probability period in the latent state (remaining number of times of special figure fluctuation that can be executed during the latent state), the effect mode at the time of winning a small hit is varied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation under execution and the remaining number of special figure variation counts that can be performed during the latent state are determined. If it is determined that the number of times that the special figure variation that can be executed during the latent condition increases when the big hit variation is discarded as shown in FIG. 1, the “chance display” indicating that the small hit B is won at a timing advantageous to the player is displayed. If it is determined that it is displayed and the special figure fluctuation number that can be executed during the latent state decreases if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is discarded, it indicates that the player wins the small hit B at a disadvantage timing to the player. Configured to display Good.

<About the contents of effects in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, an example of a display mode of a distinctive effect among effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 (a) shows the display content displayed when the small latency B is won for the special figure 2 fluctuation while the remaining latency probability period is a predetermined number of times (30 times) or more and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation. FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view showing an example, in which the remaining latency probability period is less than a predetermined number of times (30 times), and the special figure 1 fluctuation during the special figure 1 fluctuation causes the small hitting B to It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content displayed when it wins. In addition, about the element same as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above among the various display modes (display area) displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is carried out I omit it.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit, when the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the high of the special symbol The probability state is configured to shift to the low probability state, and in the state where the latent state is set, the number of times of residual figure fluctuation until it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol (remaining latency period) A small display area Dm21 is formed as a display area for showing a display mode ("44 times" in the figure) for showing the image. That is, FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the latent state ends when the special figure fluctuation is performed 44 times.

  Further, FIG. 115 (a) is a latent state during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation and is displayed when the small jackpot B is won by the special figure 2 lottery, that is, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is discarded. Therefore, the special display 1 variation is forcibly displayed in the small display area Dm1 in the display mode (“541”) indicating that the variation is forcibly removed, and the small display area Dm2 is displayed. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode ("246") in which the special figure 2 fluctuation shows a small hit. Then, in the main display area Dm, as a small hitting notification effect for notifying the player that the small hit B has been won, the treasure box 817 is opened, and the effect pattern 818 is displayed in a display mode indicating “V” from inside Ru. In addition, in the present embodiment, a lucky display feature 851 is displayed from within the treasure box 817 to indicate that the timing when the small hit B is won during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation is a timing advantageous to the player. It is composed of

  That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 jackpot is more advantageous for the player than the special figure 1 jackpot (there are many winning balls in the jackpot, a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is easy to be set) Is configured to be easily awarded, and in the latent state, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easily executed with respect to other gaming states.

  Therefore, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the definite change state and the latent state is set, the small figure is won by the special figure 2 lottery, and the special figure 1 jackpot variation being executed is destroyed. It is the most advantageous game to win the jackpot in Figure 2 lottery. However, in the present embodiment, even if the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game is ended, when the special figure fluctuation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the state is changed to the low probability state of the special symbol. Since it is configured to shift, when the timing to discard the special figure 1 jackpot variation is late in the state where the latent state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is discarded, and the special figure 2 jackpot is selected. There is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol may end without winning.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining latency period at the timing of discarding the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation during the latency state is determined, and based on the determination result, the game in which the present jackpot destruction becomes advantageous to the player It is comprised so that it can be shown (notified) whether it is a result. Specifically, when the remaining latency period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) for discarding the special figure 1 big hit variation is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times (special figure variation 30 times), the remaining latent condition Since it is possible to easily win the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, the lucky display mode 851 indicating that the player wins the small hit B at a good timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (a) ).

  On the other hand, if the remaining latency period at the timing of winning the small hit (small hit B) for discarding the special figure 1 big hit variation is less than the predetermined number of times (30 special variation), the remaining latent condition is Since it is difficult to win the jackpot in FIG. 2 lottery, a pinch display mode 851 indicating that the player wins the small win B at a bad timing for the player is displayed (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable according to the remaining latency period at the time of winning the special figure 2 small hit. Therefore, the small hit game that is frequently executed during the latent state can be given more meaning, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that the player does not get bored with early.

<About transition of the game state transition of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, transition of the gaming state transition of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic view schematically showing transition of the gaming state transition of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed while the high probability state of the special symbol is set as a condition for the high probability state of the special symbol to transition to the low probability state with respect to the second embodiment described above It differs in the point which added the conditions in connection with the special figure fluctuation frequency which is done, and other than that it is identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in the fourth embodiment, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set after the big hit, the special figure change is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) Then, it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this manner, an upper limit can be set during a period in which a gaming state (high probability state of special symbol) advantageous to the player is set, so an extra benefit is given to the player. It is possible to suppress the

  Also, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the latent state is configured to be the gaming state most advantageous to the player, and the special view in the state in which the normal state is set. As a jackpot, jackpot (jackpot A) in which a definite change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the jackpot game end and a jackpot state after jackpot game end (high probability state of special symbol Because it has a big hit (big hit B, big hit C) in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, it is a big hit game than in the case of transitioning to a latent state via a probability change state after the end of a big hit game. It is possible to play the game in the latent state for a long period if the latent state is set after the end. Therefore, the player can be interested in which game state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the game transition between the probability change state and the latent state, the special symbol is selected based on the number of times of special figure fluctuation executed during the high probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit game is over. Although it is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state, without being limited thereto, the high probability state of the special symbol is on condition that the gaming state is shifted from the probability change state to the latent state The condition for ending (transition to the low probability state) may be set again.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122. FIG. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is in that the configuration of the part was changed. The same elements as those of the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 117, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment changes the jackpot type selection 2 table (not shown) to the jackpot type selection 4 table 202 cd with respect to the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above. And the variation pattern selection 2 table (not shown) is different in that it is changed to the variation pattern selection 4 table 202ce. The other elements are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The jackpot type selection 4 table 202 cd defines the contents of the jackpot type set when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the fourth embodiment, and the jackpot type selection 2 table of the second embodiment described above On the other hand, the contents of the regulation for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game are changed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, the contents of the various tables included in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd will be specifically described. In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot type is selected by referring to a different table in accordance with the gaming state, and specifically, it is referred to for normal use 4 when the jackpot is won in the normal state. It has a table 202 cd 1 and a table 4 for probability change / latency confirmation 202 cd 2 which is referred to when a jackpot is won in a probability change state or a latent state.

  FIG. 118 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the 4 tables for ordinary use 202 cd 1. As shown in FIG. 118, the contents defined in the normal 4 table 202 cd 1 are replaced by the time saving counter 203 m instead of the time saving flag 203 m with respect to the normal table 202 d 1 (see FIG. 13) used in the second embodiment described above. It is different in that the content of the probability variation counter 203cg is changed to 203 cm, the probability variation flag 203g, and the other respects are the same.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", "50" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and "50" is set to the value of the probability change counter 203cg, and other big hit In the case of (“big hit B” to “big hit D”), “0” is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and “50” is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg. In other words, when "big hit A" is selected, a probability change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is executed 50 times after the big hit game is over, special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) It is set to continue up to the point, and when “big hit B” to “big hit D” is selected, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) after the big hit game is the special figure It is set to continue until the fluctuation is executed 50 times.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts, and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is stopped at the special figure fluctuation stop timing. Is configured to update (subtract). That is, when the 50th special figure fluctuation is executed after the definite change state is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is “0” and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is “1” during the special drawing fluctuation period. That is, the latent state will be set.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state is set according to the length of the fluctuation time set to the 50th special drawing fluctuation, so that the player can make special Not only the lottery result of the fluctuation (the result of the judgment of success or failure) but also the result of selection of the fluctuation pattern (the result of selection of the fluctuation time) can be made interesting. Furthermore, in this case, when selecting the fluctuation pattern (outlier fluctuation pattern) in the case where the lottery result of the 50th special drawing fluctuation is out, it is possible to obtain a long time (10%) with a slight probability (for example, 0.1%). Minute) (outly long fluctuation) is selected, and in the period of the latent state set when this very long fluctuation is selected, rather than winning the jackpot in the special figure lottery The player may be configured to be given many benefits.

  Note that values of various counters and update conditions may be set so that the latent state is not set during the final change (in the present embodiment, the 50th special figure change) in which the positive change state is set, for example, 51 The value of the short time counter 203 cm immediately before the start of the second special figure change (period from when the 51st special figure change start condition is established to when the change pattern corresponding to the special figure change is selected) It may be configured to be "0". Thereby, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the period when the 50th special figure fluctuation is being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of updating (subtracting) the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is the stop timing of the special figure fluctuation, but it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the stop timing of the 50th special figure fluctuation Immediately before the 51st special figure fluctuation starts (the period from when the 51st special figure fluctuation start condition is established to the jackpot determination corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, or until the fluctuation pattern is selected) The value of the probability variation counter 203cg may be updated (subtracted). By configuring in this way, even if the 51st special pattern change is performed while the 50th special figure change is being executed, the special symbol of the special pattern change is performed for the 51st special pattern change Since the jackpot determination based on the high probability state is not executed, it is possible to suppress that the player is given an excessive benefit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the contents defined in the 4 tables 202cd for probability change / latency confirmation will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the table for the probability variation / latency determination 4 202 cd 2. As shown in FIG. 119, specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" to "big hit C", "50" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and "50" to the value of the probability change counter 203 cg Is set, and in the case of "big hit D", "0" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and "50" is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg. In other words, when "big hit A" to "big hit C", ie, special figure 1 big hit is selected, the definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) after the high hit game is a special symbol It is set to continue until the fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) is executed 50 times, and when "big hit D", ie, special figure 2 big hit is selected, the latent state (high of special symbol) after the big hit game is over The probability state, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set to continue until the special figure fluctuation is executed 50 times.

  By configuring in this manner, during the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change state, during the latent state), the special figure 2 jackpot is easier to set the latent state than the special figure 1 jackpot. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game aiming for the special figure 2 jackpot by discarding the special figure 1 jackpot. In addition, since the jackpot discarded by the special figure 2 jackpot does not become the jackpot most advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120, in the present embodiment, with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 19) of the second embodiment described above, instead of the probability change flag 203g, the probability change counter 203cg is replaced with the time saving flag 203m, and the time saving counter 203 cm is It differs in the point provided, and other than that is the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability variation counter 203cg is a counter for measuring a period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a period for which the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0 (one or more) is special It is configured to be a high probability state of the symbol. The value of this probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (one subtracted) at the timing when the special symbol variation (special figure variation) stops. In addition, when the stop display (final display) is performed in the display mode indicating that the special drawing lottery result is a big hit, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set to "0".

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value (for example, 50 times) of the probability variation counter 203cg is set based on the winning jackpot type at the end timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the value of the probability change counter 203cg is larger than 0, the jackpot determination or the selection of the variation pattern according to the high probability state of the special symbol is executed, and when the special figure variation is stopped, the value is decremented by one. Be done. That is, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of times of special figure fluctuation, and when “50” is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, the special symbol A period from when the high probability state is set to when the 50th special figure fluctuation stops is set as the high probability state of the special symbol.

  The short time counter 203 cm is a counter for measuring a period in which a high probability state of a symbol is set, and a period in which a value larger than 0 (one or more) is set as the value of the time short counter 203 cm is normal. It is configured to be a low probability state of the symbol. At this time, the value of the short counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted by 1) at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts. Further, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is set to “0” at the timing when the big hit fluctuation is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, at the end timing of the jackpot game, a value (for example, 50 times) of the time saving counter 203 cm is set based on the jackpot type won. And when the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, the hit determination (the hit determination of the second symbol) according to the high probability state of the normal symbol or the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol (the second symbol) The selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed, and when the special figure variation is performed, its value is decremented by one. That is, the value of the time saving counter 203 cm is configured to be updated (subtracted) according to the number of times of special figure fluctuation, and when “50” is set to the value of the time saving counter 203 cm, the height of the normal symbol is high. A period from when the probability state is set to when the 50th special figure fluctuation starts is set as the high probability state of the normal symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg set at the end timing of the big hit game and the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm are the same numerical value (50), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to set various gaming states based on the number of times of execution of the special figure variation, and it is possible to provide the player with various games. Specifically, a jackpot type is set in which a numerical value smaller than the value (for example, "100") of the probability variation counter 203cg is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (for example, "1") in part of the jackpot type. Thus, among jackpot types for which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is preferable to configure the easiness of transition from the probability change state to the latent state to be different. By configuring in this way, even if the probability change state is set after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to play the game while expecting the latency state to be set quickly, which makes the fun of the game It can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is an audio lamp control in the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the device 113.

  First, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of this embodiment is different in that a small hit display selection table 222 ca is added to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above, and the other is the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The small hit display selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting an effect mode (effect mode during a small hit game) for indicating that the small hit is won during the latent state, and the probability change at the time of the small hit A different effect mode is selected based on the value of the counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 122, contents defined in the small hitting display selection table 222ca in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit display selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 122, in this small hitting display selection table 222ca, different display modes are defined in correspondence to the kind of winning small hit, the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223a, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223cc. It is done.

  Specifically, when the small hitting type is “small hitting A” and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223 ca is “50 to 1”, the value of the effect counter 223 cc is “chance” in the range of “0 to 69” The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the display mode of "," in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, when the small hitting type is "small hitting B" and the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is "50 to 31", the value of the effect counter 223 cc is a display of "chance" in the range of "0 to 69". In the case where the display mode of "chance" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the probability variation counter 223ca is "30 to 1", the value of the effect counter 223 cc is "0 to 99". The display mode of "pinch" is defined in the range of.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the processing for the special figure 1 change being executed is made different depending on the small hitting type selected when the small hitting is selected in the special figure 2 lottery, and specifically, the small hitting type If "small hit A" is selected, the game is temporarily suspended without subtracting the variation time of the special figure 1 change during the small hit game until the small hit game is over, and after the small hit game is over The control (interruption control) which restarts the subtraction of the fluctuation time which had been interrupted is executed, and when “small hitting B” is selected, the timing when the small hitting game is executed (the special symbol in the display mode which shows the small hitting) The control (discard control) for forcibly stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed in the display mode indicating the disconnection is executed at the timing when the stop display (decision display) is performed.

  In this way, by having the small hit that can discard the special figure 1 jackpot variation being executed and the small hit that can not be discarded, it is small whether the special figure 1 jackpot variation being executed has been discarded or not It can be suppressed that the player is easily determined only by the presence or absence of the execution of the hit game. Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the small hitting notification effect is configured to be different based on the selected small hitting type. Thus, it is possible to provide enjoyment to predict whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot variation has been discarded by confirming the display mode of the small hit notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol high probability state is configured to shift to the low probability state when the special figure fluctuation number reaches a predetermined number of times, and a small hit B is won, and it is in execution. When the special figure 1 change of is discarded, a new special figure 1 change is configured to be executed after the small hitting game is over. Therefore, if the small hitting game based on the small hitting (small hitting B) which discards the special figure 1 fluctuation during the latent state is executed frequently, the special figure fluctuation frequency is due to the special figure fluctuation where the lottery result was discarded It is updated frequently, and it is not possible for the player to enjoy the latent state sufficiently.

  That is, in this embodiment, in the first latent period during which the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed during the period in which the latent state is set, it is a game that the small figure B is won in the special figure 2 lottery In the second latency period after the special game 1 jackpot variation is discarded, it becomes the advantageous game result for the player to win the small hit A in the special figure 2 lottery. In this manner, by configuring the small hitting type that is advantageous to the player to be switched within the period in which the same gaming state (latency state) is set, the timing to win the small hitting and the winning are won. The player can be made interested in both the small hit type of content and the fun of the game.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the special figure 1 jackpot has been discarded or not by the small hitting B won during the latent state, 1 In the state where the jackpot has already been discarded, even if the player wins the small jackpot B, it is configured to select the display mode of the small jackpot display in the same process as when winning the small jackpot A. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the small hit won after the special figure 1 jackpot variation is discarded is "small hit A" or "small hit B".

  In this embodiment, even if the drawing result is a special drawing fluctuation discarded, the special drawing fluctuation count is subtracted as one special drawing fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the drawing It is also possible not to add the feature map variation whose result is discarded to the number of feature map variations. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation number is updated (subtracted) at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and when the lottery result is discarded, the special figure fluctuation number may be updated (added). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the same number of special drawing lottery results as the number of times of special drawing fluctuation in which the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Control Device in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the setting of the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm, the updating process, and the process executed using each value are provided with respect to the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the setting of the probability change flag 203g and the short time flag 203m, the update process, and the process executed based on the setting status of the probability change flag 203g and the time short flag 203m are deleted. Specifically, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S331 in FIG. 96), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) is replaced with the gaming state update process (see S332 in FIG. 97). The state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is replaced with the first special symbol change stop process 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98) and the first special symbol change stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) This embodiment is different in that the jackpot end process 4 (see S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed instead of the process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99). In the fourth embodiment, the target of the process to be executed on the above-mentioned first special symbol (special figure 1) is from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2) Is different from the second embodiment in that the process for the special figure 2 which is changed to the above is also executed, but the target of the process for the special figure 1 described above is changed to the special figure 2 and used in each process The same elements as in the first embodiment are different only in that they are changed to the elements for the second image, and the other elements are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S351) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S331 in FIG. 96) described above, but the value of the probability variation counter 203cg instead of the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g The difference is that the process of determining (see S471 in FIG. 123) and the process of determining the value of the short timer 203 cm in place of the setting of the short flag 203m (see S472 in FIG. 123) are performed. It is the same. About the same processing content, the same numerals are attached and detailed explanation is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the game state update process 4 (S271) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state update process 4 (S271). This game state update process 4 (S271) is executed at the start timing of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the process of updating (subtracting) the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm, and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg A process of determining a value and setting a state command for indicating the current gaming state is executed.

  When the gaming state update process 4 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S671), 0 If it is determined that it is larger than 1 (it is 1 or more) (S671: Yes), the value of the hour counting counter 203 cm is decremented by 1 (S672), and the remaining hour count command indicating the value of the hour counting counter 203 cm after subtraction is set (S673). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S671 that the value of the hour-short counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S671: No), the process proceeds to S675 described later.

  The remaining-time short-time number command set in the process of S673 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same process as other commands. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the number of times of special figure fluctuation until the time saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) ends by receiving the remaining time short number command, and the presentation aspect based on the remaining time short number (for example, , Set the remaining time short display).

  When the process of S673 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm after subtraction is 0 (S674), and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not 0 (S674: No), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S674 that the value of the short time counter 203 cm is 0 (S674: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is larger than 0 (S675). If it is (S675: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S653), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is not larger than 0 (S675: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this processing is ended. Moreover, in the process of S671, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S671: No) Next, the process proceeds to the process of S675 described above, the process of S653 or S654 is performed, and the process ends.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to appropriately determine the gaming state to be changed based on the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability change counter 203 cg, and the determination result is reliably transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Can be output to Furthermore, in this embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg is updated (subtracted) at the stop display timing of the special symbol. Because of this, the command to indicate the current gaming state is configured to be able to be set at both the special figure fluctuation start timing and the special figure fluctuation stop timing. Thereby, the current gaming state can be determined in more detail.

  In the present embodiment, since the numerical value set to the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the numerical value set to the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg are the same, the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203 cg There is no big difference between the two, but by changing the value set in the time-shortening counter 203 cm and the value set in the probability variation counter 203 cg, the gaming state when the values of the various counters become 0 It may be configured to make the transition of. Even in such a case, a command indicating the gaming state can be reliably set by using the gaming state update process 4 (see FIG. 124) of the present embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (see S251). This first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is the stop display timing of the special symbol in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S232 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. Is different in that processing for updating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is added. About the processing content other than that, it is the same and abbreviate | omits the detailed description.

  When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S251 in FIG. 125) is executed, the special figure 1 jackpot flag (flag indicating that the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won among the jackpot flag 203n) is set to ON If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not set to ON (S801: No), it is then determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0. (S851).

  When it is determined in the process of S851 that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the present is in the high probability state of the special symbol (S851: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is 1 A state command indicating the gaming state corresponding to the current value of the short time counter 203 cm and the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set (S853), and the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is subtracted by the processing of S852. A subtraction command indicating that is set (S854), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S851: No), the present process is in the normal state, and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the update process of various parameters (probability variation counter 203cg, time reduction counter 203 cm) which causes the game state to be shifted is performed at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation and the stop timing. Specifically, the processing for updating the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is executed at the start timing of the special chart change, and the processing for updating the value of the probability change counter 203 cg is executed at the stop timing of the special view change. . By configuring in this way, for example, the special figure fluctuation is made when the positive change state (the game state in which the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm is “50” and the value of the positive change counter 203 cg is set to “50”) is set. When the value of the hour counter 203 cm is updated (subtracted) at the start timing of and the value becomes “0”, the game state is shifted from the probability change state to the latent state for a period until the special figure fluctuation ends. Furthermore, it becomes possible to shift the latent state to the normal state at the timing when the special figure fluctuation ends. Therefore, the latent state can be provided to the player only for a specific period (special map fluctuation period).

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the start timing of special figure fluctuation (the timing when the gaming state update process 4 (see S371 in FIG. 124) is executed) and the timing when the special figure fluctuation ends (first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 It is configured to set a state command for indicating the current gaming state at both of the timings (see S251 in FIG. 125). Even if it is the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment that gaming state may shift in multiple times during the period from the start of one special figure change to the end by comprising in this way, voice lamp control The current gaming state can be reliably determined on the device 113 side.

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the value of the probability variation counter 203cg is set (initially set) based on the jackpot type set, and a command (count command) for indicating the set value (for example, 50) It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113, and is further configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113 a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg has been subtracted. Accordingly, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the count command, the value (for example, 50) of the probability variation remaining count counter 223 ca is set based on the information included in the count command, and the subtraction command is received. Each time, the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223 ca is configured to be decremented by one. As a result, the main control unit 110 only needs to set a command (count command) for indicating the initial setting value and a command (subtraction command) for indicating that it has been subtracted. Since it is not necessary to set a command indicating the value of 203 cg, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. The present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 may be configured to set a remaining number command for directly indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg.

  Referring back to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S801 that the special view 1 jackpot flag is on (the jackpot has been won) (S801: Yes), the processes of S804 to S816 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. And the process ends. In the present embodiment, the element to be reset is the value of the probability variation counter 203cg instead of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time decrement counter 203cm instead of the time saving flag 203m in the process of S813 in the second embodiment. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 of FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126). This jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is a process for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished, with respect to the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. Is different. Specifically, in the second embodiment described above, the process of setting (on / off setting) the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m according to the winning jackpot type is executed, while the present embodiment The difference is that the process of setting the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When this jackpot end process 4 (S2571 in FIG. 126) is executed, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and in the process of S2701 If it is determined that the value of the counter 203h is 2 (S2701: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203cg and the value of the time reduction counter 203cm (S2771), and the value of the probability variation number counter 203h is set to 0 (S2703), shift to the processing of S2709, and end this processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing is executed in the order of S2701 and S2704, then it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a definite change state or a latent state (S2772), and then a positive change state or a latent state If it is determined that (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether the present jackpot type is the jackpot D (S2752), if it is determined that it is the jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203cg Is set to “50”, and the value of the hour reduction counter 203 cm is set to “0” (S2775), and the process shifts to the process of S2709.

  If it is determined in the process of S2752 that the present jackpot type is not the jackpot D (is the jackpot A to C) (S2752: No), then the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm and the value of the probability change counter 203cg Set “50” to both (S2773), and shift to S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2772 that the gaming state at the time of winning is a definite change state or not a latent state (a normal state) (S2772: No), whether the current jackpot type is a jackpot A If it discriminate | determines (S2706) and it discriminate | determines that it is jackpot A (S2706: Yes), after performing the process of S2773 mentioned above, it will transfer to the process of S2709.

  In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the jackpot is not A (S2705: No), "50" is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, "0" is set as the value of the time shortening counter 203 cm (S2774), and the process of S2709. Transition to In the process of S2709, the same process as the jackpot end process 2 (see S2551 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed, and thereafter, the probability variation counter 203cg set in the jackpot end process 4 (S2571) described above And a count command to indicate the value of the time reduction counter 203 cm (S2776), and the process ends.

<About the control contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, control contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is the maximum period (value of the probability change counter 203cg on the main control device 110 side) in which the high probability state of the special symbol can be set with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above. Processing for displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 a display mode (probability change residual number display) for notifying (indicating) to the player the special figure fluctuation frequency required until the symbol becomes 0, and the latent image Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation has been destroyed by the small hitting election (execution of the small hitting game) in the small hitting notification effect which is executed when the small hitting is won in the state where the definite state is set And the process of setting the display mode for suggesting. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, contents of the command determination process 4 (S4151) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4151). This command determination process 4 (S4151) is different from the above-described command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) in that processing when the remaining number of times command is received from the main control device 110 is added. The elements of are identical. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When command determination processing 4 (S4151) is executed, the processing of S4201 to S4214 that is the same as the command determination processing (see S4111 in FIG. 59) described above is executed, and the fluctuation stop related command is received in the processing of S4213. If it is determined that there is not (S4213: No), then a count related command (a count command for indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, a subtraction command for indicating that the value of the probability variation counter 203cg has been subtracted) is received It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4251), and if it is determined that it has been received, the number related processing is executed (S4252), and this processing is ended.

  Here, in the processing related to the number of times executed in the processing of S4252, the presence or absence of the high probability state of the special symbol and the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203cg (remaining period) A process of setting a display command for displaying a display mode (remaining probability variation number) based on the determination result is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4252 that the count related command has not been received (S4251: No), the process of S4215 to S4221 identical to the command determination process described above (see S4151 in FIG. 59) is executed. Execute this process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the number related process (S4252) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number related process (S4252). When the number related processing (S4252) is executed, it is first determined whether the number related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401), and if it is not determined as a subtraction command (S5401: No), subtraction is performed. The process skips various processes executed when a command is received, and shifts to the process of S5410 described later.

  If it is determined that the related command received this time is a subtraction command (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variable remaining number counter 223ca is larger than 0 (S5402). (S5402: Yes), the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is decremented by 1 (S5403), and a display remaining number command indicating the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca after subtraction is set (S5404), and then, after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405).

  In the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 1 (S5405: Yes), the high probability state of the special symbol is soon to end, so the high probability state of the special symbol A display command is suggested to indicate that the command has ended (S5406). Here, in the present embodiment, when the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223 ca is 1 (afterward, a special drawing of one rotation), the ending suggestion notification for suggesting the timing when the high probability state of the special symbol actually ends. In the case where the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when the change is executed), it is configured to be executed, but the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca is 2 without being limited thereto. When the above specific value (for example, 5) is reached, the above-mentioned ending suggestion notification may be executed.

  When the process of S5406 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 223ca is 0 (S5407), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation remaining count counter 223ca is 0 (S5407; Yes), Next, an end display command for suggesting that the high probability state of the special symbol is ended is set (S5408), the hit discard flag 112cb is set to be off (Fig. S5409), and the process shifts to the processing of S5410. on the other hand. In the process of S5407, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation residual number counter 223ca is larger than 1, that is, when it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol continues (S5407: No), the S5410 Transfer to processing.

  When the process of S5410 is executed, it is first determined whether the number-of-times-related command received this time is the number-of-times command (S5410), and if it is determined that it is the number-of-times command (S5410: Yes), included in the number of times command Based on the information indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203cg, “50” is set to the value of the probability variation remaining number counter 223ca (S5411), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5410 that the command is not the number command (S5410: No), the present process ends.

  Here, the processing content of S5406 executed in the above-described number related processing (see S4252 in FIG. 128) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as a gaming state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, there is a probability change state and a latent state, and different effect modes are executed in each gaming state. There is. Specifically, in the state in which the probability change state is set, the challenge mode effect (see FIG. 89) is performed, and in the state in which the latent state is set, the RUSH mode effect (see FIG. 90) is performed. . Then, when the process of S5406 is executed, it is determined whether the present gaming state is a probability change state or a latent state, and a display command corresponding to the determination result is set. There is. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, a display command which suggests that the high probability state of the special symbol is ended is set regardless of the gaming state, and the display control device 114 receives the display command. In this case, the end indication effect corresponding to the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed.

  Next, the contents of the small hitting associated process 4 (S5054) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process 4 (S5054). This small hit related process 4 (S5054) is a small hit related process described above (see S5004 in FIG. 71) in that the process for setting the effect mode in the small hit game performed in the latent state is added. And is different. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the small hit related process 4 (S5054) is executed, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251). In this process, the current gaming state stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and the determination is executed based on the read information. If it is determined in the process of S5251 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5251: No), the small hitting display command corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and the present process is ended. In the present embodiment, it is not an appropriate game that the small hit game is executed while the latent state is not set, for example, an error notification (a comment on "Please hit the left") It is comprised so that the display in the small hit game containing may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5251 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5251: Yes), next, it is determined whether the small hitting type of the small hitting that was won this time is the small hitting B (S5252) If it is determined that the small hit B (S5252: Yes), the hit discard flag 223cb is set to ON (S5253), and the process proceeds to S5254. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5252 that the small hitting type of this time is not the small hitting B (it is the small hitting A) (S5252: No), the process of S5253 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5254. .

  In the process of S5254, it is determined whether or not the hit discard flag 223cb is set to ON (S5254), and if it is set to ON (S5254: Yes), regardless of the small hit type of the small win that was won this time, The display mode is determined with reference to the small hit A table of the small hit display selection table 222ca (S5256), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5254 that the hit discard flag 223cb is not set to ON (S5254), the value is small based on the value of the probability change counter 203cg and the value of the acquired effect counter (not shown). The display mode in the small hit game is determined from the hit display selection table 222ca (S5255), a display command indicating the determined display mode is set, and the present process is ended.

  That is, in the small hitting related process 4 (S5054 in FIG. 129) executed in the present embodiment, the small hitting B of the small hitting display selection table 222ca is made only when the small win B is won for the first time after the latent state is set. It is configured to set the display mode with reference to the user table. That is, the display mode is determined using a dedicated table (table for small hit B) only when small hit is selected, which can discard the special figure 1 big hit variation, and other small hit wins (small hit A elected, and already At the time of the small hit B after discarding the special figure 1 jackpot variation) is configured to determine the display mode using a common table (table for small hit A).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small hitting type of the small hitting that is won after discarding the special figure 1 jackpot variation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues (number of times of special figure fluctuation) is specified, the special figure fluctuation is discarded based on the small hitting win, and the special figure fluctuation frequency is wasted It can make it hard to understand that is subtracted.

<First Effect Example Showing an Example of Effects Performed in Each Embodiment Above>
As described above, in the first to third embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), During the big hit change of one special symbol (during a period when the special symbol (identification information to show that the big hit is won) is displayed variably (dynamically displayed), the other special symbol is the stop showing the small hit win When the stop display (confirmed display) is executed in the form, while executing the small hitting game based on the stopped displayed small hitting, explaining the technical concept to forcibly stop out (stop the big hit) the running jackpot fluctuation did.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot winning of the second special symbol is configured to be more easily performed by the jackpot game advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, It is configured to be able to win a small hit only by the drawing of the special symbol. In addition, as the gaming state, it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol than the advantageous gaming state (for example, the latent state) where the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed and the advantageous gaming state (latency state) The disadvantaged game state (for example, the normal state) is configured to be settable.

  In the first embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to suppress that the jackpot game based on the jackpot win of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the advantageous gaming state is set. That is, by discarding the jackpot by the small jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a state advantageous to the player (a state more advantageous than not discarding the jackpot).

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the definite variation state is set, from the timing when the variation display of the special symbol for showing the jackpot winning is executed, The period until the end of the variable display is configured to set the latent state, and the latent state is configured to be a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed.

  Then, as in the first embodiment described above, it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and wins a small hit, when the winning result is stop display (confirmation display) The variable display of the first special symbol in execution is configured to be forcibly ended (discard the big hit) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out.

  In the second embodiment configured in this manner, the termination condition of the latent state is also included by discarding the jackpot of the first special symbol based on having won the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it can be discarded, it can be made longer than the period (the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol) initially set as the period in which the latent state is set. That is, by discarding the big hit by the small hit, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player's advantageous state (latency state) is set.

  Further, in the third embodiment described above, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, it is configured such that a small winning can be won in any of the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. When the player wins a small hit in one of the special symbol lottery, the other jackpot can be discarded.

  In the third embodiment configured as described above, when the gaming state (latency state) advantageous to the player is set, there is a situation where the latency state is ended by the jackpot game being executed. It can suppress that it occurs. That is, by discarding the big hit by the small hit, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player's advantageous state (latency state) is set.

  As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to provide the player with a first benefit game (big hit game) capable of giving a benefit advantageous to the player and a benefit less than the first benefit game (big hit game). The second benefit game (small hit game) is configured to be executable, and a special benefit (setting of an advantageous game state, or an advantage for the player according to the situation in which the second benefit game is executed. It is configured to be able to give an extension of the period in which the gaming state is set).

  Further, when the condition for executing the second benefit game is established, the condition for executing the first benefit game is configured to be discarded, but the timing at which the condition for executing the second benefit game is satisfied. Or depending on the game content of the first benefit game to be executed based on the discarded conditions, if the condition to execute the first benefit game is discarded based on the establishment of the condition to execute the second benefit game Is more advantageous to the player than not being discarded.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the condition for executing the second bonus game is established, specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for showing a small hit (decision display). If a second bonus game (small hit game) is executed, a benefit other than the benefit (for example, a bonus for discarding a jackpot in which a jackpot type is set against the player among a plurality of jackpot types, It is possible to give the player an interest as to whether or not the player is given the benefit of discarding the jackpot that would be advantageous for the player to end the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  And in each embodiment mentioned above, when performing the effect for showing a player that it was elected in small hitting, not only the presence or absence of small hitting election but the small hitting game which is granted by the small hitting election The player is also notified and informed of the presence or absence of the benefit. Here, in the present effect example, the contents of effects at the time of winning a small hit performed in the pachinko machine 10 having the technical concept of each embodiment described above will be described.

  In this example of the effect, as an effect (small hit suggestion effect) for showing a small hitting win, a passing / failing mode indicating the presence or absence of a small hitting win, and a discarding mode suggesting a lottery content of a special symbol discarded by the small win. , And can be displayed.

  Specifically, as a pass / fail mode, it is formed by a first pass / fail mode formed of the letter "V" for notifying small wins and a letter "sorry" for notifying small wins. At least the display of the second pass / fail mode and the third pass / fail mode formed by the characters “?” The first destruction mode formed by the letters "Lucky" for notifying that the special symbol lottery (variation) has been destroyed and the lottery (variation) of the special symbol not winning the jackpot has been destroyed The second destruction mode formed in the display mode of "??" for informing the user and a notification that the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is simply destroyed without suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol discarded Form with the word "discard" to The third and the discard mode, the at least capable of displaying being.

  By setting the effect mode in this manner, it is possible to suggest to the player the presence or absence of a small hit and the content of discarding the special symbol variation to be executed based on the small hit. It is possible to provide enjoyment to predict future game content.

  In the present production example, although the above-mentioned success or failure mode and the discarding mode are displayed in different modes, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the success or failure judgment result of the small hit is discarded The display mode of one effect mode (fusion mode) may be set on the basis of both of the lottery results of the special symbols. As a result, since it is possible to predict a plurality of game results from the displayed fusion mode, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the future game content.

  Further, in the present effect example, although the pass / fail mode and the discard mode are displayed at the same time, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after the pass / fail mode is displayed, the discard mode is displayed Alternatively, after displaying the discard mode, the pass / fail mode may be displayed. As described above, by making the display timings of the two modes (pass / fail mode, discard mode) different from each other, it is possible to easily predict the mode to be displayed next after confirming the mode displayed earlier. . In addition, it is possible to play a game while wishing that a predetermined mode is displayed as the content of the next mode to be displayed after grasping the previously displayed mode.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present production example, when one small symbol is won (special symbol lottery), the variation of the other special symbol is executed when the small winning is won (the small hitting symbol is stopped). If not, since there is no special symbol variation discarded due to the current small hit, there is no display of the discarding mode described above. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to distinguish the game situation at the time of the small hitting on the basis of the display mode displayed at the time of the small hitting (when the small hitting symbol is stopped).

  Furthermore, in the present production example, when the lottery result of the special symbol discarded based on the small hit is a big hit, the big hit type set in association with the big hit is determined, and based on the determined result The display mode (display mode of the first discard mode) can be varied. In addition, it determines the gaming state which is set at the time of winning a small hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a small hit), and the display mode (the first discarding mode also based on the determination result Is configured to be variable. Specifically, only when the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is configured to set the above-mentioned pass / fail mode and the discard mode. By configuring in this manner, the to-is-necessary aspect or only when discarding the other special symbol variation being executed on the basis of having won a small hit in one special symbol lottery greatly affects the game. Since the effect using the discard mode can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Second Effect Example Showing One Example of Effect Performed in Each Embodiment Above>
In the first effect example described above, the effect for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the special symbol discarded based on the small hit is described. By performing such an effect, it is possible to suggest to the player various benefits to be awarded based on having won a small hit, so it was possible to improve the interest of the game. . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiments, while the jackpot variation is being executed with one special symbol, a small winning is won in the other special symbol lottery (a condition for executing a small hit game is established) Since the game property which can give the privilege which is advantageous to the player is a new game property which has not been achieved in the prior art, while the big hit fluctuation is being executed with one special symbol, the other There was a possibility that it would not be possible to acquire a bonus without playing a game aiming for a small hit with the special symbol of.

  Therefore, in the second effect example, effects for aiming a small hit in the other special symbol are explained in detail based on the fluctuation condition (lottery result) of one special symbol.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) variation being executed during the latent state is a big hit, and it is a big hit (special figure variation being executed, If it is determined that the special figure 1 is a jackpot fluctuation), it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery is being executed or the special figure 2 hold exists. Here, when it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery is being executed, or the special figure 2 reserve is present, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is selected by winning the small figure by the special figure 2 lottery. Since it is possible to discard, a normal right-handed notification is performed to the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 lottery is not being executed and the special figure 2 suspension is not present while the special figure 1 jackpot variation is being executed during the latent state, the state as it is Then, since it is in a state where it is not possible to discard the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation based on the small hit win, the strong right hit notification that emphasizes and gives a right hit game to the player than a normal right hit notification. Run. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the jackpot game based on the special figure 1 jackpot win is executed during the latent state, and the player is provided with a disadvantageous situation.

  In addition, in this 2nd production example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution is not big hit, for example, when it is out of fluctuation, it is not limited to the above-mentioned production mode, for example, special figure 2 lottery is executed Even if it is not in the middle and there is no special drawing 2 reservation, it is configured not to execute the strong right-handed notification. Furthermore, in this case, the special figure 1 jackpot variation is not performed during the period in which the outlier change of the special figure 1 is being executed (during the long change), and the special figure 2 lottery is further performed. Since the player is not in the state, the effect display may be executed to notify the player that the player can take a break once and can not leave the game.

  As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol and the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not simultaneously executed for each configuration, and the prizes that trigger each lottery Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes the lottery in the order in which the information was acquired (the order of entering the first entrance 64 and entering the second entrance 640) or drawing of one of the special symbols You may comprise so that it may use for the pachinko machine 10 of the type which is executed.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed, and a particular jackpot is won with one of the symbols, the other symbol is stopped when the fluctuation is stopped. In the above, although the variation of C is eliminated (forced stop at disconnection) or interruption is performed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed when the jackpot variation is started. Furthermore, even if the player wins a small hit due to the change of the other special symbol, the change of the other special symbol is discarded or interrupted depending on the small hit type, but the change of the small hit starts It may be set from time to time.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, although it explained using the display production displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 as an example of the various productions performed, it is a production mode which produces the same objective effect. It is sufficient for the player to use a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10 You may use the light emission production | presentation alert | reported.

  Also, as various effects performed in each embodiment described above, a notification effect for making the player know the contents surely and a suggestion effect for notifying the content without hesitation are used for the notification effect. Alternatively, the suggested effect may be executed, or the notified effect may be executed instead of the suggested effect.

  Furthermore, in each embodiment mentioned above, it uses the pachinko machine 10 which provided two kinds (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) of the probability (big hit probability) of winning the big hit by lottery of special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a setting unit (for example, setting switch) capable of setting one setting value out of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and for each setting value set by the setting unit The main controller 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

  In this case, for example, six setting values of 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is configured to be the highest, and the setting value “6” is set. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order to minimize the jackpot probability.

  In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to differ according to the setting value, or the high probability of the special symbol Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

  In addition, depending on the setting value mentioned above, not only the jackpot probability, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is made different, the probability of winning in a small hit is made different, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variation time may be made different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easy to select only when a specific set value is set is provided, and whether a special symbol variation based on that fluctuation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type is executed The player may be configured to determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to the player.

  Furthermore, a setting command for indicating the set value set is set, and a setting indication effect is suggested to suggest the set value currently set based on the set command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. You may do, the command (the command for showing the lottery result) which shows the jackpot type which is output from main control 110 and the command (the command for showing the fluctuation time) in order to indicate the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol When it is received, the setting value currently set may be determined from the content of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result may be executed. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, as in each embodiment described above, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the drawing (variation) of the first special symbol and the drawing (variation) of the second special symbol, the above-described set value can be set When using the above configuration, various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol varies according to the set value set. In the setting value of the special game state that the lottery of one of the special symbols is advantageous to the player, in the case of the predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol Various parameters may be defined for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player that the special symbol lottery is easy to be executed, and the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (a bonus (big hit game content) This is a concept including that the small hit game contents, the game state set after the big hit game end) is advantageous to the player.

  It should be noted that the game state transition destination after the big hit in each game state and the transition distribution ratio may be appropriately set without being limited thereto. For example, the time saving state transitioning from the normal gaming state may be only the time saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention of the player who can not shift to the definite change state despite the jackpot winning in the normal game state.

  Moreover, regardless of the gaming state, the transition destination and distribution ratio of the gaming state are unified according to the type of the special drawing, but there is no limitation to this and the transition destination and transition distribution ratio of the gaming state according to the gaming state May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated gameplay, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early in the game.

  In the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases) in the main control unit 110, the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, although the 3rd symbol display for showing a player the lottery result of each symbol is performed by one display means (3rd symbol display device 81), it uses composition of other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated by pressing the player as the operating means that can be operated by the player. The operation means may be configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or that the player is operated with contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operation means that can be determined, a wireless type operation means that can be determined to be operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Also, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. The operation control may be partially or entirely performed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the production performed using the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81, and a game (lottery) itself is a sound lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, processing for executing a game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects The processing for this may be configured to be performed by the same control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes by one control device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the type of the special symbol is not limited to this, and three or more The special symbol type of may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to the rule in which several special symbols were predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is independently performed were demonstrated. However, each of the game characteristics described in the embodiments may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of combinations of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (generally referred to as setting), and the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of stages of setting, any combination of jackpot probability (combination of jackpot probability in low probability state and jackpot probability in positive change state) in any of plural stages (for example, 6 stages) Although what can be set to is mentioned as a representative example, it is not restricted to this. As a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of jackpot, for example, instead of or in combination with the jackpot probability, according to the setting May be That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be varied. More specifically, for example, the rate at which a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is varied depending on the setting, or the small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined It is also possible to vary the degree of advantage for each setting by varying the ratio according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio in which the jackpot to which a large number of short time (for example, 100 times) is given after the big jack end is determined is varied according to the setting, or the small jack (for example, 0 times) is given The rate at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the rate at which the jackpot is determined to shift (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) can be varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) Depending on the setting, the rate at which the jackpot is determined (or is easy to shift) may be changed. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (which is hardly determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. And in setting 6, while the number of rounds is determined the number of rounds of six rounds at a rate of 2% when becoming a big hit, in other settings only six rounds of jackpots are determined at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as composition. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play by paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot be able to. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of becoming the jackpot type to which 66 times of time reduction may be given after the jackpot end may be configured to be higher than other settings. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game jackpot type in which the big winning opening (or prizes inside the big winning mouth etc) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types A configuration may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined in a specific setting (a ratio to be determined is increased). Also, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the jackpot is set in a disadvantageous setting for the player. It is good also as composition which makes a jackpot probability high so that it exists. In this configuration, in particular, in the definite change state, the more the number of drawing special symbols, the easier it is to increase the number of balls (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired) It is effective in the gaming machine. More specifically, for example, by applying to a game machine of a type that lasts until the probability change state wins the next big win, and in the probability change state is a small hit type with high probability, the advantage of high setting is achieved The sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big hit is likely to be large, so there are many chances to obtain a winning ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the definite change state, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit.

  All or some of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Discard the big hit with a small hit)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game machine comprising: means for displaying the first dynamic information displayed on the basis of a condition established during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to the identification information to be other than the specific first determination result, and the second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information A game machine A1 characterized by having switching means which can be switched to execute control.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine A1, according to the condition that the first identification information being dynamically displayed is established, the first control to forcibly cause other than the specific first determination result and the second control to interrupt the dynamic display The first identification information can be dynamically displayed differently from the time of the dynamic display start according to the established conditions, thereby providing the player with various effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, the switching unit is configured to receive the first type privilege in the second benefit during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. As a first condition, the first control can be executed, and a second type privilege in the second benefit is awarded during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine A2 characterized in that the second control can be executed with the second condition in the condition being set.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the provided benefit can be switched, so it is given to the player There is an effect that it can be made easy to recognize a privilege.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means executes the dynamic display of the first identification information based on being determined as the specific first determination result as at least one of the establishment conditions of the first condition. A game machine A3 characterized in that the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the condition that the first condition is satisfied that the first identification information based on being determined as the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Since it is set to at least one of these, it is effective in the ability to suppress that a 1st privilege is provided, and to limit the provided privilege.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A3, a game machine A4 characterized in that the first benefit is a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, since the first benefit is set to be more advantageous than the second benefit, it is forcibly stopped that the first benefit is provided. Thus, the second privilege can be easily provided by suppressing the inconvenience that the euphorism is increased in a short period by being suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting A game is characterized in that the first gaming state can be set based on the provision of the first benefit while the second gaming state is set. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the provision of the first benefit is restricted by the execution of the first control in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first gaming state is not given but the first benefit is not provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress such a problem that the second gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state and the interest of the player is significantly reduced.

  A gaming machine A6 comprising: suggestion effect performing means capable of executing suggestion effects for facilitating the establishment of the first condition when any of the gaming machines A1 to A5 meets a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the suggestion effect is made to facilitate the establishment of the first condition, whereby the execution of the suggestion effect achieves the fulfillment of the first condition It is possible to make people expect the game and to improve the interest of the game.

<Features B group> (variation difficulty of jackpot fluctuation due to jackpot)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game machine including: means for displaying the dynamically displayed first identification information based on establishment of a first condition during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First control means capable of executing first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result, and varying the establishment frequency of the first condition A game machine B1 having a frequency changer capable of

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency at which the first control is executed can be varied by the frequency varying means, the frequency at which the first benefit is awarded can be varied, and the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a person gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first condition can be satisfied based on the provision of the second benefit when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The frequency variable unit is configured to vary the establishment frequency by varying the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining unit. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be varied by varying the second dynamic display period corresponding to the specific second determination result to be determined, which is easy. Has the effect of being able to vary the frequency by such control.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, as the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means, a short dynamic display period group is set such that a short dynamic display period is easily selected, and a long At least a long dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period is set to be easily set is set, and the frequency variable means is either the short dynamic display period group or the long dynamic display period group A game machine B3 characterized in that the establishment frequency is varied by setting one.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment frequency can be varied by switching the dynamic display period group, so by setting various dynamic display period groups, There is an effect that the frequency of establishment can be switched in various ways.

<Feature C group> (Available period can be changed by winning a small hit)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game state setting unit configured to set a game state setting unit capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; During the period when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, it is possible to switch and set the first gaming state to the second gaming state, The gaming machine sets a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first benefit is awarded, and the first identification information is set by the first dynamic display means. During the dynamically displayed period, the first condition is met A first control means capable of executing first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result based on A game machine C1 characterized by having.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to avoid switching to a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player by executing the first control, so playing a game in anticipation that the first condition is established. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is provided when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, by the provision of the second benefit, it is possible to avoid that the first benefit is granted and the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set. Since there is, it is possible to play the game in expectation of the second benefit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, based on the determination as the special second determination result. Game machine C3 characterized in that a special benefit which is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit is given to the player by the second determination, so that the provision of the first benefit is restricted. Even in this case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that reduces the player's willingness to play the game.

  A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first condition can be satisfied even when the special benefit is given.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the provision of the first benefit is restricted even when the special benefit is awarded, which is disadvantageous to the player. While restricting the setting of the gaming state, the player can be given special benefits to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where the special benefit is given in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first identification information being dynamically displayed is such that the dynamic display is interrupted until a release condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted when the special benefit is given in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, so the special benefit is given. There is an effect that it is possible to give an interest about the result of the first judgment even after

<Feature D group> (Aim for an advantageous jackpot during jackpot fluctuation (Replay removal on ST aircraft))
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game state setting unit configured to set a game state setting unit capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; When the second gaming state is set, the first gaming state is set based on the provision of the first benefit, and the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means A gaming machine D1 characterized by switching and setting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the number of times the ending number of times being reached.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the player may be switched to the first gaming state when the number of determinations is the end number, or the first gaming state may be set by the provision of the first benefit. There is an effect that it is possible to play various games, and it is possible to suppress a defect that the user gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state setting unit performs the second gaming based on execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is possible to set the first gaming state after setting the state and ending the dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D2, since the period of the second gaming state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the period of the second gaming state is determined. The player can be made interested in the dynamic display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the first identification being displayed dynamically based on the establishment of a first condition. A game machine D3 comprising: first control means capable of executing first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to information to be other than the specific first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first condition is satisfied, and it can be forced to be other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent transition to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to raise expectations for the establishment of the first condition and to improve interest.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, the second condition is provided. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is configured to be established under the condition of.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the provision of the second benefit is a possible requirement of the first condition, so that the value for the second benefit can be increased. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature E group> (remaining term effect C group effect of the advantageous period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game machine including: means for displaying the dynamically displayed first identification information based on establishment of a first condition during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First control means capable of executing first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result, and the first control means serving as the specific first determination result (1) A gaming machine characterized by including suggestion effect performing means capable of performing suggestion effect suggesting a remaining period of the first dynamic display period when identification information is dynamically displayed. E1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, the indication condition that suggests the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, so that the first condition is satisfied. (1) The player can recognize the period in which the awarding of benefits is restricted, and can give an interest in the timing at which the first benefit is granted, and suppresses the problem that the player gets bored with the game early It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine E1 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means comprising: (1) When the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. A game machine E2 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of being able to increase value.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is provided that the second benefit is provided when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is configured to be established.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition can be established on the condition that the second benefit is given, so that it is possible to set the value of the second benefit given. There is an effect that it can be enhanced.

<Feature F group> (informing the period when the small hitting win is advantageous)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the first determination result specific to the display means A first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing; and a second judging means capable of executing a second determination The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determination that can determine the second dynamic display period of the second identification information Means and a display mode for displaying the second determination result specific to the display means, when the second identification information is displayed, a second benefit can be awarded which is advantageous to the player A game machine F1 comprising: benefit variable means for varying the benefit awarded by the second benefit based on the timing of applying the second benefit.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the benefit provided by the second benefit is variable according to the application timing of the second benefit, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the second benefit is provided, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine F1, the dynamic display is performed based on execution of the provision of the second benefit during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the provision of the first benefit can be avoided by executing the first control, and the value that the second benefit can be enhanced is there.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first benefit granting means grants one benefit type as the first benefit from a plurality of different benefit types, and is awarded when the first control is executed. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it is possible to notify suggestion information based on the benefit type in the first benefit that has been able to be played.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the player can recognize the type of the first benefit not granted by the suggestion information, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Feature G group> (notify the contents of discard)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination; and first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; A first dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; The second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for indicating the second judgment result by the second judgment means, and the second dynamic display means A second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, wherein the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is If it is displayed, the bonus type to be given to the player is a plurality of different bonus types. In the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first benefit granting means capable of granting the first benefit corresponding to the benefit type of 1, and the first dynamic display means, the first condition is met. First control means capable of executing first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information other than the specific first determination result, based on the first control information; When the first control is executed, notification information that can suggest information corresponding to the type of the first benefit given by the first benefit giving means if it is the specific first determination result is notified A gaming machine G1 characterized by:

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are set to either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, triggered by the termination of the winning state. In this conventional gaming machine, by making the types of start-up winning openings that the player mainly makes a prize different in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the amusement of the game is made different by changing the gaming state, and various games are performed. The interest is improved by providing the player with the character (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392). The lottery game to be executed when the game ball is won to the start winning opening is only displayed by fluctuation with a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early There was a point.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize the type of the first benefit not granted by the execution of the first control by the suggestion information, and the interest of the game is improved, and the player is early The effect is that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is provided when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A game machine G2 characterized in that it is configured as possible.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, since the first condition can be satisfied by the provision of the second benefit, the value of the second benefit can be enhanced.

  The game machine G1 or G2 has effect executing means capable of executing effects based on the provision of the second benefit, and the effect executing means varies the effect based on the suggestion information A game machine G3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the effect to be executed based on the provision of the second benefit is changed by the suggestion information, so the first benefit and the award are provided. It is possible to compare with the second benefit to be done, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (3)

First determination means capable of performing the first determination;
First dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means;
First dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means;
First benefit giving means capable of giving a first benefit which is advantageous to a player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for showing the specific first determination result on the display means;
A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination;
Second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means;
Second dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the second dynamic display period of the second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means;
A second benefit giving unit capable of giving a second benefit which is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating the specific second determination result on the display unit;
In a gaming machine having gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The gaming state setting means can switch and set the first gaming state to the second gaming state in a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is
The gaming machine is
It is to set a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first benefit is awarded.
During a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the first corresponding to the first identification information being dynamically displayed based on the establishment of a first condition. A game machine characterized by comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control for forcibly setting a determination result to be other than the specific first determination result.   When the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, the first condition can be satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is provided. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that: The second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result,
The special benefit which is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is provided to the player based on the determination as the special second determination result. Of gaming machines.

Images